Before attempting to connect or operate this product

,
please read these instructions carefully and save this manual for future use.
System Controller
Operating Instructions
Model Nos. WV-CU950
WV-CU650
The serial number of this product may be found on the bot-
tom of the unit.
You should note the serial number of this unit in the space
provided and retain this book as a permanent record of your
purchase to aid identification in the event of theft.
Model No.
Serial No.
Caution:
Refer to the name plate on the rear of this product to verify
identifications and power ratings.
NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to com-
ply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to pro-
vide reasonable protection against harmful interference
when the equipment is operated in a commercial environ-
ment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate
radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to
cause harmful interference in which case the user will be
required to correct the interference at his own expense.
FCC Caution: To assure continued compliance, (example -
use only shielded interface cables when connecting to com-
puter or peripheral devices). Any changes or modifications
not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user's authority to operate this equip-
ment.
For U.S.A
WARNING: To prevent fire or electric shock hazard, do not expose this appliance to rain or moisture. The apparatus shall not be exposed to
dripping or splashing and that no objects filled with liquids, such as vases, shall be placed on the apparatus.
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK,
DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
ENGLISH VERSION
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol,
within an equilateral triangle, is intended to
alert the user to the presence of uninsulated
"dangerous voltage" within the product's
enclosure that may be of sufficient magni-
tude to constitute a risk of electric shock to
persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral
triangle is intended to alert the user to the
presence of important operating and mainte-
nance (servicing) instructions in the litera-
ture accompanying the appliance.
SA 1965
SA 1966
2
3
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
1) Read these instructions.
2) Keep these instructions.
3) Heed all warnings.
4) Follow all instructions.
5) Do not use this apparatus near water.
6) Clean only with dry cloth.
7) Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
8) Do not use near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that
produce heat.
9) Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider
than the other. A grounding-type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are
provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the
obsolete outlet.
10) Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles and the points
where they exit from the apparatus.
11) Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer.
12) Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus. When a
cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-overs.
13) Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time.
14) Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way,
such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus
has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped.
S3125A
4
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
This product is a system controller to operate PS·Data sys-
tem units and connected cameras. (A surveillance control
system cannot be composed of this product alone.)
IN NO EVENT SHALL MATSUSHITA ELECTRIC INDUSTRI-
AL CO., LTD. BE LIABLE TO ANY PARTY OR ANY PER-
SON, EXCEPT FOR CERTAIN WARRANTY PROGRAM
OFFERED BY THE LOCAL DEALER OF PANASONIC, FOR
THE CASES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO BELOW:
(1) ANY DAMAGE AND LOSS, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIM-
ITATION, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSE-
QUENTIAL OR EXEMPLARY, ARISING OUT OF OR
RELATING TO THE PRODUCT;
(2) PERSONAL INJURY OR ANY DAMAGE CAUSED BY
INAPPROPRIATE USE OR NEGLIGENT OPERATION
OF THE USER;
(3) UNAUTHORIZED DISASSEMBLY, REPAIR OR MODIFI-
CATION OF THE PRODUCT BY THE USER;
(4) INCONVENIENCE OR ANY LOSS ARISING WHEN
IMAGES ARE NOT DISPLAYED, DUE TO ANY REASON
OR CAUSE INCLUDING ANY FAILURE OR PROBLEM
OF THE PRODUCT;
(5) ANY PROBLEM, CONSEQUENTIAL INCONVENIENCE,
OR LOSS OR DAMAGE, ARISING OUT OF THE SYS-
TEM COMBINED BY THE DEVICES OF THIRD PARTY.
5
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS ..............................3
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY .................................................4
PREFACE ............................................................................6
FEATURES ..........................................................................6
PRECAUTIONS ...................................................................7
DOCUMENT CONVENTION ...............................................8
NOTIFICATION ABOUT SYSTEM UNITS ............................8
NOTIFICATION ABOUT
OPERATION MODES...........................................................8
DETAILED PRODUCT DESCRIPTION ..............................9
MAJOR OPERATING CONTROLS
AND THEIR FUNCTIONS ..............................................10
I Main Unit ...............................................................10
I 3D Joystick Unit ....................................................14
I LCD Display Descriptions ....................................15
INSTALLATIONS AND SYSTEM CONNECTIONS..........19
INSTALLATIONS AND CONNECTIONS .......................20
I Basic System Connections ...................................20
I Connection with the 3D Joystick Unit ...................21
I Adjustment of 3D Joystick ....................................21
WV-CU950/650 SETUP PROCEDURES..........................23
SETUP PROCEDURES (HARDWARE) ..........................24
I Setup Procedures .................................................24
I MODE Switch Setting ...........................................24
I CONTROLLER NO. Switch Setting .......................25
SETUP PROCEDURES (FIRMWARE) ............................26
I Administrator Password Entry ..............................26
I Setting Modes .......................................................26
I All Reset ................................................................26
I PS·Data Communication Setting ..........................27
I To Change the Administrator Password ...............31
I PS·Data Database Copy .......................................32
I PS·Data Operator Password Check .....................33
OPERATING PROCEDURES (PS·DATA)........................35
BEFORE OPERATION ...................................................36
I Power-on ...............................................................36
I Power-off ...............................................................36
I Basic Operation Flow ...........................................37
I LCD/Buzzer Adjustment .......................................38
I Operation Start (Login) .........................................38
I If You Have Forgotten the Login Password ..........40
I Operation Start (Auto Login) .................................40
I Operation End (Logout) ........................................40
UNIT SELECTION .........................................................41
I System Unit Selection ...........................................41
I Recorder Selection ...............................................41
I Monitor Selection ..................................................42
I Camera Selection .................................................42
SYSTEM UNIT CONTROL .............................................43
I Multiscreen Display ..............................................43
I Electronic Zooming ...............................................43
I Tour Sequence/Group Sequence .........................43
I On-screen Display (OSD) Control ........................44
I System Function Control .......................................44
RECORDER CONTROL ................................................45
I Manual Recording ................................................45
I Playback ...............................................................45
I Search Playback ...................................................45
I Time & Date Search Playback ..............................49
I Other Available Functions ....................................49
CAMERA CONTROL .....................................................50
I Camera Panning/Tilting Control ............................50
I Zooming Control ...................................................50
I Lens Iris Control ....................................................50
I Lens Focus Control ...............................................50
I Preset Position Control .........................................51
I Home Position Control ..........................................51
I Camera Function Control ......................................51
I Camera Position Control .......................................52
I Camera Selection Recall ......................................52
I Wiper Control ........................................................52
I Defroster Control ..................................................53
I Auxiliary Control ....................................................53
I Other Functions ....................................................53
ALARM CONTROL ........................................................54
I System Controller Behavior
during the Alarm Mode .........................................54
I Alarm Reset ..........................................................54
I Alarm Suspension .................................................54
I Alarm History Search ............................................54
MENU FUNCTION DESCRIPTIONS ..............................57
I Menu Flow ............................................................57
I Menu Function Categories ...................................58
I To Recall Menu Functions ....................................61
I Factory Default Setting of Button Functions
and Joystick Button Functions ..............................62
I To Assign Menu Functions
to Function Buttons ...............................................63
I To Assign Menu Functions
to Joystick Function Buttons .................................63
I To Recall Button Functions
and Joystick Button Functions ..............................64
I To Check Button Functions
and Joystick Button Functions ..............................64
MENU FUNCTION DETAILS .........................................65
I Camera Functions ................................................65
I Recorder Functions ..............................................67
I System Functions .................................................68
I Controller Functions ..............................................70
I Joystick Button Functions .....................................80
TROUBLESHOOTING .......................................................85
SPECIFICATIONS..............................................................87
STANDARD ACCESSORIES..............................................87
CONTENTS
6
PREFACE
System Controller WV-CU950 and WV-CU650 are designed for setup and operation of cameras and other system units
installed in a surveillance system.
FEATURES
• This product can control cameras, matrix switchers, and recording devices such as digital disk recorders.
• One WV-CU950/650 System Controller can control two or more PS·Data system devices.
In addition, up to 4 system controllers can be connected for multiple operation. The system controller has improved func-
tions such as camera control, multiscreen segment switching, and search playback. These are fundamental functions to
surveillance control systems.
• Improved camera controllability
This product has employed a 3D joystick which is separated from the main unit. You can control the camera zooming by
moving the zoom wheel controller of joystick, so that you can control cameras and pan/tilt heads by holding the joystick
with one hand.
• Improved recorder controllability
This product has employed the JogDial and shuttle ring to improve the control of recorded images.
• Customization flexibility
You can assign frequently-used functions to the function buttons. The function assignment is possible while watching the
LCD.
• Authentication by user ID’s and passwords
Operation authority (=user level) is assignable to each user ID. In addition, password is assignable to prevent inappropri-
ate operations.
• System Controller WV-CU950 can control Central Processing Unit WJ-MPU955 and System 850 Matrix Switcher via
an Ethernet (10/100 Base-T) network.
Note: You need to upgrade the software version of Central Processing Unit WJ-MPU955/855/850.
7
PRECAUTIONS
• Refer all work related to the installation of this
appliance to qualified service personnel or system
installers.
• Do not block the ventilation opening or slots on the
cover.
To prevent the appliance from overheating, place it at
least 5 cm {2 inches} away from the wall.
• Do not drop metallic parts through slots.
This could permanently damage the appliance. Turn
the power off immediately and contact qualified service
personnel for service.
• Do not attempt to disassemble the appliance.
To prevent electric shock, do not remove screws or
covers.
There are no user-serviceable parts inside. Contact
qualified service personnel for maintenance.
• Do not expose nor operate the appliance in
wet/damp conditions.
Take immediate action if the appliance gets wet. Refer
servicing to qualified service personnel. Moisture could
damage the appliance and also cause electric shocks.
• Handle the appliance with care.
Do not strike or shake, as this may damage the appli-
ance.
• Do not expose the appliance to water or moisture.
Do not try to operate it in wet areas.
Take immediate action if the appliance gets wet. Turn
the power off and refer servicing to qualified service
personnel. Moisture can damage the appliance and
also cause electric shocks.
• Do not use strong or abrasive detergents when
cleaning the appliance body.
Use a dry cloth to clean the appliance when it is dirty.
When the dirt is hard to remove, use a mild detergent
and wipe gently.
• Do not operate the appliance beyond its specified
temperature, humidity, or power source ratings.
Use the appliance under conditions where tempera-
tures are between –10 °C and + 50 °C {14 °F to 122
°F}, and humidity below 90 %.
The appliance may be not linked to a network after turn-
ing on in a cold atmosphere between –10 °C and 0 °C
{14 °F to 32 °F}. Wait approximately 20 minutes until the
inside temperature has risen to 0 °C {32 °F}, it can be
linked to a network.
The input power source for this appliance is 120 V AC,
60 Hz.
• Do not use any AC adapter other than the one
supplied.
• Only use the appliance indoors.
Do not install it in places where the appliance is
exposed to sunlight for long periods of time or near air
conditioning equipment. This will cause deformation,
discoloration, breakdown or malfunction.
8
DOCUMENT CONVENTION
• This document uses the following convention when describing the use and operation of this unit.
System controller: Panasonic System Controller WV-CU950/650
Caution(s): Caution statements identify conditions or practices that could result in damage to this product or injury.
Note(s): Note statements identify special instruction, rule, or side comment related to the topic.
• The operating procedures of digital disk recorder differ depending on models.
This document uses the following terms for classification.
NOTIFICATION ABOUT SYSTEM UNITS
• Matrix Switcher WJ-SX150 Series Ver. 2.04 or later supports this system controller. However, some details on connections,
settings, and operations are different from those described in this document. The different details are described in the fol-
lowing document.
Addendum for WV-CU950/650 and WJ-SX150 Series
• When connecting Central Processing Unit WJ-MPU855/850 with System Controller WV-CU950/650, check the software ver-
sion of central processing unit.
The available software versions are as follows.
Ver. 1.xx: Ver. 1.60 or later
Ver. 2.xx: Ver. 2.10 or later
Note: Refer to System 850 Matrix Switcher Operating Instructions for details on connections, settings, and operations.
• When connecting Central Processing Unit WJ-MPU955 with System Controller WV-CU950/650, check the software version
of central processing unit.
The available software versions are as follows.
Ver. 3.xx: Ver. 3.10 or later
Ver. 4.xx: Ver. 4.10 or later
Note: Refer to WJ-MPU955 Operating Instructions for details on connections, settings, and operations.
NOTIFICATION ABOUT OPERATION MODES
This document describes only operating procedures performed in the PS·Data mode. When you use System Controller WV-
CU950 or WV-CU650 in modes other than PS·Data, the operating procedures differ depending on system connections. Refer
to the operating instructions of system devices for details.
Note: If Matrix Switcher WJ-SX150A is connected to the system controller, refer to the following document.
Addendum for WV-CU950/650 and WJ-SX150 Series
Term Examples of Model Nos. Remarks on Model Nos.
Begins with "WJ-HD316" or "WJ-HD309". WJ-HD300 Series
WJ-HD316, WJ-HD316A,
WJ-HD309, WJ-HD309A
Begins with "WJ-HD500". WJ-HD500 Series WJ-HD500, WJ-HD500B
Begins with "WJ-HD200" or "WJ-HD220". WJ-HD200 Series WJ-HD200, WJ-HD220
Begins with "WJ-HD100". WJ-HD100 Series WJ-HD100
9
DETAILED PRODUCT
DESCRIPTION
10
MAJOR OPERATING CONTROLS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS
I Main Unit
G Front View
Note: Available functions differ depending on connected
devices.
¸ Operation indicator (OPERATE)
This indicator is lighting while power is supplied to the
system controller.
¸ Alarm indicator (ALARM)
This indicator blinks when an alarm is activated.
Blinking changes to steady light when the alarm is auto-
matically reset.
¸ Alarm suspend indicator (ALM SUSPEND)
This indicator lights up when an alarm is suspended.
¸ Shift button (SHIFT)
To activate the alternate function of each button, press
this button in combination with buttons associated with
special functions.
¸ Clear button (CLEAR)
Clears the parameter entered with numeric buttons.
¸ Alarm reset/Alarm all reset button (ALM RESET/
ALM ALL RESET)
• In the PS·Data mode, this button cancels (resets) all the
alarm inputs at a time.
• In the terminal mode, this button cancels (resets) a
selected alarm input.
• In the terminal mode, when you press while holding
down the SHIFT button, this button cancels (resets) all
the alarm inputs at a time.
Note: ALM ALL RESET is reserved for future use.
¸ Alarm Acknowledge button (ACK)
This button acknowledges a selected alarm input, and
manual operation of alarm-related camera becomes
available.
Note: In the PS·Data mode, this function is reserved for
future use.
¸ Alarm/Alarm suspend button (ALARM/ALM
SUSPEND)
• When you press while holding down the SHIFT button,
this button temporarily stops alarm inputs to all the sys-
tem units. When an alarm is suspended, "ALM SUS-
PEND" indicator lights up.
CLEAR
OPERATE
ADJUST MENU F1 F2 F3 F4 EXIT ENTER
ALARM
PLAY/PAUSE
SHUTTLE
HOLD
STOP
REV FWD
REC STOP REC
ALARM
ALM RESET
ACK
ALM SUSPEND
ALM ALL RESET
OSD
CAM FUNC
ALM RECALL
SEQ PAUSE
MON LOCK
TOUR SEQ
MULTI SCREEN
GO TO LAST
EL-ZOOM
AUX1 ON
MARK
AUX2 ON
OFF
OFF
WIPER
SEARCH
DEF ON
OFF T&D SEARCH
SEQ STOP
LOGOUT
GROUP SEQ
SYS FUNC
1
3
HISTORY
RECORDER PRESET
PGM
PRESET
CAM
POSI
CAM
(SET)
MON
(ESC)
UNIT
2
4
6
5
7
9
8
0
ALM
SUSPEND
SHIFT
+ —
SYSTEM CONTROLLER
WV-CU950
¸ ] ¸ ¸
]
¸ ¸ ¸ ¸ ¸
} ¡ } } } ¡ }
,
]
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
,
]
]
]
]
]
,
,
,
,
, , , , ,
]
¸
]
(This is the illustration of WV-CU950.)
11
• When you press after entering numeric buttons, this
button selects an alarm input.
Note: This function is available only when the system
controller is connected to System 850 Matrix
Switcher.
¸ Camera function/System function button
(CAM FUNC/SYS FUNC)
• Recalls a function of camera by the function number.
• When you press while holding down the SHIFT button,
this button recalls a function of external system unit by
the function number.
Note: This function is available only in the PS·Data
mode.
] Alarm recall button (ALM RECALL)
Displays the log of alarms activated in the past.
] On-screen display button (OSD)
Toggles the display items on the active monitor.
] Monitor lock/Logout button (MON LOCK/LOGOUT)
• Every time you press, this button activates and deacti-
vates monitor lock.
• When you press while holding down the SHIFT button,
you can log out of the system.
] Tour sequence/Group sequence button
(TOUR SEQ/GROUP SEQ)
• Runs an assigned tour sequence on a selected monitor
for the specified duration.
• When you press while holding down the SHIFT button,
this button runs an assigned group sequence.
] Sequence pause/Sequence stop button
(SEQ PAUSE/SEQ STOP)
• Pauses a sequence.
• When you press while holding down the SHIFT button,
this button stops a sequence.
] Go to last button (GO TO LAST)
Plays back the latest recorded image.
] Electronic zoom button (EL-ZOOM)
Enlarges an image presently displayed on an active
monitor.
] Multiscreen selection button (MULTI SCREEN)
Divides a monitor screen in multiscreen segments to
display camera images simultaneously. Every pressing
this button can change multiscreen segment patterns.
(The available patterns differ depending on recorders.)
] Mark button (MARK)
When you press this button during playback, playback
start point will be marked. You can start playback at the
start point. (Refer to the operating instructions of
recorder.)
Note: This button is available only for Digital Disk
Recorder WJ-HD300 Series.
] Auxiliary 2 ON/OFF button (AUX 2 ON/OFF)
• Turns on an auxiliary device (AUX 2).
• When you press while holding down the SHIFT button,
this button turns off the auxiliary device (AUX 2).
, Auxiliary 1 ON/OFF button (AUX 1 ON/OFF)
• Turns on an auxiliary device (AUX 1).
• When you press while holding down the SHIFT button,
this button turns off the auxiliary device (AUX 1).
, Search/Time and date search button (SEARCH/
T&D SEARCH)
• Activates search functions of recorders.
• When you press this button while holding down the
SHIFT button, the date and time appears on the LCD for
time & date search playback.
, Defroster button (DEF ON/OFF)
• Turns on a defroster of camera housing .
• When you press while holding down the SHIFT button,
this button turns off the defroster.
, Wiper button (WIPER)
Turns on or off a wiper of camera housing.
, Stop button (STOP)
Stops the playback of recorded images.
, Play/Pause button (PLAY/PAUSE)
• Starts the search playback of recorded images.
• When pressed during playback, this button pauses the
playback.
, Recording button (REC)
• Pressing this button starts recording by a recorder.
• Pressing this button for two seconds stops the record-
ing.
, Shuttle ring (Outside)/JogDial (Inside)
Shuttle ring:
• When rotated to the right, the playback image is
fast-forwarded. (Fast-forward)
• When rotated to the left, the image is rewound. (The
playback speed differs depending on recorders.)
(Fast reverse)
• Moves the cursor to the next or previous item on the
LCD.
• Moves to the next or previous main item on the
function list.
JogDial:
• Plays back recorded images frame by frame when
this dial is rotated during playback pause. (Single
frame skip)
• When rotated to the right, playback will be skipped
to the next record. When there is no newer record,
normal playback will be continued. (Skip)
12
• When rotated to the left, playback will be skipped to
the previous record. When there is no former
record, normal playback will be continued. (Skip)
• Selects a parameter setting or a character on setup
menus.
• Moves to the next or previous sub item on the func-
tion list.
, Shuttle hold button (SHUTTLE HOLD)
• If you press this button while rotating the shuttle ring,
playback speed will be maintained even after removing
a hand from the shuttle ring. (The LED indicator on this
button blinks during the fast playback.)
Note: This operation differs from “Hold playback
speed” performed by holding the shuttle ring of
recorder. When you hold the playback speed from
the system controller, the EL-ZOOM, MULTI-
SCREEN, and OSD buttons are unavailable.
• If you press this button again, normal playback speed
is recovered.
, History button (HISTORY)
When you press the + or – button while holding down
this button, camera images selected in the past are dis-
played in order or in reverse order.
¡ – button (–)
This button is pressed when selecting a camera with
the lower channel number. During setup, this button is
pressed to decrease the value of selected parameter.
¡ + button (+)
This button is pressed when selecting a camera with
the higher channel number. During setup, this button is
pressed to increase the value of selected parameter.
¡ Recorder/Unit Selection button (RECORDER/UNIT)
• Selects a recorder.
• When you press while holding down the SHIFT button,
this button selects a system unit.
¡ Preset/Program preset button (PRESET/PGM
PRESET)
• Recalls a preset position or the home position of combi-
nation camera.
• When you press while holding down the SHIFT button,
this button programs preset positions.
¡ Camera position button (CAM POSI)
This button is pressed to select the camera position
(the combination of camera number and preset posi-
tion).
¡ Numeric buttons (0, 1 to 9)
Enters camera numbers, monitor numbers, or unit num-
bers, etc.
¡ Monitor/Escape button (MON (ESC))
• Selects a monitor.
• When pressed during setup, this button determines the
current selection to return to the main menu.
¡ Camera/Set button (CAM (SET))
• Selects a camera.
• When pressed during setup, this button selects an item
to go to a submenu.
¡ LCD (Liquid Crystal Display)
Displays the numbers of unit, monitor and camera cur-
rently selected. The LCD also displays the functions
assigned to F1 to F8 buttons.
¡ Adjustment button (ADJUST)
This button is pressed to perform the settings of LCD
brightness, LCD contrast, alarm buzzer, or button
buzzer.
} Menu button (MENU)
• Displays the list of menu functions on the LCD.
• Menu functions are assignable to the function buttons
(F1 to F4/F5 to F8) or joystick function buttons (A, B,
and top buttons).
Note: This function is available only in the PS·Data
mode.
} Function buttons (F1 to F4/F5 to F8)
• In the PS·Data mode, this button recalls functions you
have assigned.
• In the PS·Data mode, when you press while holding
down the SHIFT button, the F1 to F4 buttons become F5
to F8.
• In the terminal mode, this button activates a function
displayed on the LCD.
} Exit button (EXIT)
While a menu function, determined with the ENTER but-
ton, is being displayed on the LCD, this button is
pressed to return to the upper menu.
} Enter button (ENTER)
While menu functions are displayed on the LCD, this
button determines the menu selection, and displays the
submenu on the LCD.
} Feet
When extending these feet, you can raise the front side
by approx. 1 cm {0.39 in.}.
13
G Rear View
DC9V IN MODE DATA SERIAL
CONTOROLLER
NO. JOYSTICK 10/100 BASE-T
CAUTION
ATTENTION
CAUTION-CONNECT TO
SPECIFED CLASS 2 POWER
SUPPLY ONLY. SEE MANUAL
} j } } } } j
(This is the illustration of WV-CU950.)
} Joystick connector (JOYSTICK)
This connector is used for connection with the joystick.
} Serial port (SERIAL)
This port is used for connection with a PC for system
configuration.
} Data ports (DATA)
• These ports are used for connection with the system
controller and other system units via RS-485 communi-
cation.
• These ports used when adding other system controller
connections.
} Mode Selection switches (MODE)
The operation mode of system controller is selected
with these switches. (Refer to p. 24 for the setting.)
} Controller Number switch (CONTROLLER NO.)
When two or more system controllers are connected in
the system, this switch determines the unit number of
each controller. (Refer to p. 25 for the setting.) If con-
necting only one system controller in the system, set
this switch to “1”.
j DC 9 V Input jack (DC9V IN)
An AC adapter, supplied with the system controller, is
plugged into this jack.
j 10/100 Base-T port (10/100 BASE-T) (WV-CU950
only)
This port is used for connection with Central Processing
Unit WJ-MPU955/855/850 via an Ethernet network.
LINK indicator: This indicator lights up when the
system controller is linked to a network through this
port.
ACT indicator: This indicator lights up when the
system controller receives or sends data through
this port.
LINK indicator
ACT indicator
14
j Top button
The top button is pressed to recall a function already
assigned.
j Zoom wheel controller
This controller is used for zooming cameras equipped
with specific lenses.
j Iris control buttons (IRIS CLOSE, OPEN)
These buttons close or open the lens iris of cameras
equipped with specific lenses.
j Focus control buttons (FOCUS NEAR, FAR)
These buttons adjust the lens focus of cameras
equipped with specific lenses.
j A and B buttons (A, B)
These buttons recall functions you assign.
j 3D joystick
Controls the panning and tilting of combination cam-
eras and pan/tilt heads.
I 3D Joystick Unit
This joystick unit is used to operate combination cameras and pan/tilt heads manually.
OPEN
IRIS
CLOSE
FAR
FOCUS
NEAR A B
j j
j
j
j
j
15
I LCD Display Descriptions
The following are examples of LCD display after login in the PS·Data mode.
Notes:
• Some parts of LCD displays, described on this document, may differ from the actual status.
• Refer to the operating instructions of connected devices for details on LCD display in modes other than PS·Data.
G Default Status (LCD Display After Login)
¸ Monitor number
The number of selected monitor is displayed. 1 to 99
can be displayed as a monitor number.
¸ Camera number
• The number of selected camera is displayed. 1 to 999
can be displayed as a camera number.
• When a camera position is specified, the camera posi-
tion number is displayed.
• When a sequence is activated on the selected monitor,
"Seq" is displayed.
¸ Model number/Unit number
• The model number of connected system unit is dis-
played. When you select a system unit, the unit number
of connected system unit is displayed. The following
are examples of model number display.
"HD500": Digital Disk Recorder WJ-HD500 Series
"SX150A": Matrix Switcher WJ-SX150A
Notes:
• The model number is abbreviated when an actual
model number exceeds 6 characters.
• When you have selected a monitor supporting
PS·Data (WV-CM2080, WV-CM1780, or WV-
CM1480), the model number displayed on the LCD
is "CM2080".
Mon02 Cam016 HD316
F1 F2 F3 F4
• When you press the RECORDER/UNIT button, the unit
number of connected system unit appears. 1 to 99 can
be displayed as a unit number.
• Numerics you have entered are displayed on this area.
¸ Function number (F1 to F8)/LCD title
• In the factory default, function numbers “F1” to “F4” are
displayed. “F5” to “F8” are displayed while holding
down the SHIFT button.
• The LCD titles, assigned to function buttons (F1 to
F4/F5 to F8), can also be displayed. You can edit the
function names in up to 20 alphanumeric characters.
You can display F5 to F8 function names while holding
down the SHIFT button.
16
G Main Menu (Menu Functions)
LCD MENU CAM 101
Camera Setup
¸ Category
The category of selected menu function is displayed.
¸ Function number
The function number of selected menu function is dis-
played.
Note: Refer to p. 58 Menu Function Categories.
¸ Function name
The name of selected menu function is displayed.
G Sub Menu (Menu Functions)
Camera Setup 101
On Off Rst A.Rst
F1 F2 F3 F4
¸ Function name
The name of selected menu function is displayed.
¸ Function number
The function number of selected menu function is dis-
played.
¸ Button actions
The actions activated by the function (F1 to F4) buttons
are displayed. When pressed while holding down the
SHIFT button, actions of F5 to F8 buttons are displayed.
Note: When the selected button function has no button
actions, nothing is displayed on this area.
G Blinking
In this document, grayed areas on the illustrations mean blinking.
Mmm/DD/YYYY HH:MM 12
Mar/17/2004 12:00 AM
Blinking
17
G Messages Displayed on the LCD
Invalid
Invalid
This message is displayed in the following circumstances.
• When you have entered a wrong user ID or password,
etc.
• When you have entered a camera number or menu
number, etc. that is not existing.
Busy
• When a selected monitor is controlled by a higher-level
user, the monitor number and “Busy” blinks on the LCD.
(You cannot control the monitor.)
• When a selected camera is controlled by a higher-level
user, the camera number and “Busy” blinks on the
LCD. (You cannot control the camera.)
• To cancel the Busy status, select another monitor, or
wait until “Busy” goes out.
Prohibited
• When you have tried an operation not authorized by the
function level setting, camera level setting, or selected
system unit, “Prohibited” blinks on the LCD.
• When you have forgotten to select a system unit or
monitor before selecting a camera, “Prohibited” blinks
on the LCD.
• When you have selected a system unit disconnected
from the system, “Prohibited” blinks on the LCD.
• After a few seconds, the LCD display will return to the
default status.
Notes:
• After a few seconds, this message will automatically
disappear.
• The illustration is an example in which a camera num-
ber other than 1 to 256 has been entered.
• In this document, gray area on illustration shows blink-
ing.
Controller No.1 No Exist Error
This message is displayed when no system controller is set
to CONTROLLER NO.1. Check that a system controller is
set to CONTROLLER NO. 1 (Refer to p. 25 CONTROLLER
NO. Switch Setting.)
Mon02 Cam016 HD316
Busy
"Busy" status is activated for a monitor.
Mon02 Cam016 HD316
Busy
"Busy" status is activated for a camera.
Mon02 Cam016 HD316
Prohibited
Controller No.1
No Exist Error
18
19
INSTALLATIONS AND SYSTEM
CONNECTIONS
20
INSTALLATIONS AND CONNECTIONS
WARNING
The installations described in the figures should be made by qualified service personnel or system installers.
I Basic System Connections
The following is an example in which a recorder and data multiplex units are connected.
Note: The connection example shown in this document is available in the PS·Data mode. When applying connections in a
mode other than PS·Data, refer to the operating instructions of connected devices.
System Controller
WV-CU950/650
(Main unit)
Modular cable (supplied)
Used when adding other WV-CU950/650
system controllers (Available up to 3)
To PS·Data ports
0
9
8
7
6 5
4
3
2
1
Fixed
PS·Data Mode
Line termination: ON
Refer to pp. 24 and 25 for details on settings.
CONTROLLER NO.: 1 MODE
OFF
ON
DC9V IN MODE DATA SERIAL
CONTOROLLER
NO. JOYSTICK 10/100 BASE-T
CAUTION
ATTENTION
CAUTION-CONNECT TO
SPECIFED CLASS 2 POWER
SUPPLY ONLY. SEE MANUAL
Camera 8 Camera 9
1
to Camera 12 Camera 13 Camera 16 Camera 1
Monitor 1
Monitor 2
• • •
• • •
• • • • • •
• • • • • • • • • • • •
to
4 1 4
Data Multiplex Unit
WJ-MP204C
(Two units)
Unit Address: 2 and 3
Daisy Chain
Connection Kit
WV-CA48/10K
PS·Data
PS·Data
1 9 8 12 16 13 • • •
• • •
• • •
1 4 • • • 1 4
1 4
7 8
9 11 12
13 14 15 16
10/0
5
2
6
3
Digital Disk Recorder WJ-HD300 Series Unit Address (System) : 1
Unit Address (Controller) : 2
Line termination: OFF
POWER
ON
OFF
ALARM
Data Multiplex Unit WJ-MP204
ALARM
SUSPEND
1 2 3 4
ESC SET
RESET SUSPEND SET UP
ALARM UNIT 0 9 87 6 5 4 3 2 1 POWER
ON
OFF
ALARM
Data Multiplex Unit WJ-MP204
ALARM
SUSPEND
1 2 3 4
ESC SET
RESET SUSPEND SET UP
ALARM UNIT 0 9 87 6 5 4 3 2 1
21
I Connection with the 3D Joystick Unit
Connect the main unit and 3D joystick unit as follows.
Note: Use the main unit and 3D joystick unit whose combination codes are identical.
I Adjustment of 3D Joystick
To adjust the altitude of 3D joystick, turn the adjusting screw to the right or left.
UP DOWN
Main unit
3D joystick unit
Cable (supplied)
Combination code label
has been stuck
on the bottom.
Bottom side
Cable
connector
Combination
code label
Fit the cable
into the cable trench.
DC9V IN MODE DATA SERIAL
CONTOROLLER
NO. JOYSTICK 10/100 BASE-T
CAUTION
ATTENTION
CAUTION-CONNECT TO
SPECIFED CLASS 2 POWER
SUPPLY ONLY. SEE MANUAL
Bottom side
UP DOWN
Adjusting
screw
Up
Down
22
23
WV-CU950/650 SETUP
PROCEDURES
24
2. Set the Line termination switch of other system con-
trollers to OFF.
G Setting for Terminal Mode
Set the MODE Switch #1 and #5 to ON.
Note: Refer to the operating instructions of connected
devices for details on connections and operations.
G Setting for Connection with Central
Processing Unit
(WJ-MPU955 Series/WJ-MPU855 Series/
WJ-MPU850 Series)
Terminal mode
Note: Refer to "Setting for Terminal Mode" in this page for
the switch setting.)
Ethernet mode
To apply this mode, set the MODE Switch #4 and #5 to ON.
Note: Refer to the operating instructions of connected
devices for details on connections and operations.
System units
Line termination ON
Line termination OFF
Line termination OFF Line termination OFF Line termination ON
SETUP PROCEDURES (HARDWARE)
I Setup Procedures
Perform the setup as follows.
1. Set the MODE switches.
You will set up the communication mode and line termi-
nation ON/OFF of RS-485 communication. (Refer to
MODE Switch Setting.)
2. Set CONTROLLER NO. switches.
You will perform this setting when using two or more
system controllers in daisy chain connections. (Refer to
p. 25 CONTROLLER NO. Switch Setting.)
3. Perform WV-CU650 setups after entering the adminis-
trator password.
You will perform the settings concerning password and
communication between system controllers and other
system units, etc. (Refer to p. 26.)
Note: Before performing WV-CU950/650 setups, you need
to log into the system by entering the administrator
password. (Refer to p. 26.)
I MODE Switch Setting
You will perform the setting of the MODE switches at the
rear panel.
Notes:
• Before the setting, turn off the system controller. (Refer
to p. 36 Power-off.)
• Do not move the MODE switches to positions other than
described in these illustrations. That may cause mal-
function.
G Setting for PS·Data Mode
If using only one system controller
Set the MODE Switch #5 to ON.
If using two or more system controllers in
daisy chain connections
1. Set the MODE Switch #5 of the system controller at the
chain end to ON.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OFF
ON
MODE Switch #5 (Line termination switch)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OFF
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OFF
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OFF
ON
25
Notes:
• “0” and “9” are reserved numbers. They cannot be set
for controller numbers.
• One of the system controllers must be set to "1".
• To connect Digital Disk Recorder WJ-HD300 Series to
system controllers, the Unit Address (Controller) setting
must be different from each CONTROLLER NO. switch
setting. (Refer to the operating instructions of recorder
for details on the setting.)
G Setting for Connection with Central
Processing Unit
(WJ-MPU955 Series/WJ-MPU855 Series/
WJ-MPU850 Series)
Maintain the switch setting as “1 (factory default position)”.
I CONTROLLER NO. Switch
Setting
You will determine controller-number settings by moving
the CONTROLLER NO. switch at the rear panel.
G Setting for PS·Data/Terminal Mode
If using only one system controller
Maintain the switch setting as “1 (factory default position)”.
If using two or more system controllers in
daisy chain connections
Up to 4 system controllers are connectable in the system.
To avoid conflict, set the unique number for each system
controller.
CONTROLLER NO.
0
9
8
7
6 5
4
3
2
1
26
SETUP PROCEDURES (FIRMWARE)
I Administrator Password Entry
If you log into the system in the administrator mode,
PS·Data communication setting, all reset, operator pass-
word check. and database copy will become available.
To activate the administrator mode, you need to enter the
administrator password.
Notes:
• The factory default of administrator password is “650”.
However, for security, you should change the password
setting. To change the setting, refer to p. 31.
• Take a note of your administrator password.
I Setting Modes
If you power on the system controller while pressing the fol-
lowing buttons, the system will run in an associated setting
mode.
Notes:
• You cannot change the system from the following
modes (refer to the diagram) to the normal operation
mode. To start up the normal operation mode, turn off
the system controller, and then turn on the controller
again.
• The administrator password entry is required for the fol-
lowing modes.
* The panning, tilting, and zooming calibration settings are
not restored.
I All Reset
When the all reset mode is activated, all of the following set-
tings will be reset to the factory default.
• Administrator password
• PS·Data communication setting
• LCD brightness, contrast, alarm buzzer, and button
buzzer settings
• Button functions and joystick button functions (F1 to F8,
A, B, and top buttons)
• Controller functions
(Time & Date Type)
(Auto Login)
(Operator Setup)
(Function Level)
(Camera Level)
(Cam Posi Map)
(Cam-Unit Map)
(HDD-Unit Map)
(LCD Title)
Note: Calibration settings of panning, tilting, and zooming
will be maintained even after all reset.
Buttons pressed
while
the power-on
2, 4, and 6
MON (ESC) and 6
MON (ESC) and 1 Administrator
password change
The administrator
password can be
changed.
Setting Mode
All reset
PS·Data
Communication
setting
Description
The communication
settings and
PS·Data database
can be restored to
the factory default.*
PS·Data communi-
cation setting can
be performed.
MON (ESC) and 2
MON (ESC) and 4
PS·Data database
copy
PS·Data password
display
The PS·Data data-
base can be copied
from the source
system controller
(Controller No. 1) to
a destination sys-
tem controller.
The passwords of
up to 16 operators
can be displayed
on the LCD.
27
G Operation
1. Turn off the power.
Note: If you set the MODE Switch #1 to #4 to ON, you
can skip entering the administrator password in
Step 3.
2. Turn on the power while holding down the buttons 2, 4,
and 6.
“Admin Password” will appear on the LCD to enter the
password.
3. Enter the administrator password.
The password entered will be displayed as “∗” marks.
Notes:
• The factory default is “650”.
• To delete a character, press the CLEAR button.
• If you have entered a wrong password, the LCD
display will return to Step 2.
4. Press the CAM (SET) button.
If the password entered is correct, all the settings will
be reset to the factory default.
5. Check “End” on the LCD.
Check “End” has appeared on the LCD to inform you of
the initialization end.
6. Turn off the power.
I PS·Data Communication Setting
This setting is required to establish a connection between
the system units and system controller.
List of PS·Data communication settings
Setting Item Available setting parameter(s)
Baud Rate 4800 / 9600 / 19200 bps
Data Bit 8 bit (Fixed)
Parity Bit None / Odd / Even
Stop Bit 1 / 2 bit
Wait Time OFF / 100 msec / 200 msec /
400 msec / 1000 msec
Group Adr A to Z
Xon/Xoff Not Use (Fixed)
Note: Factory defaults are underlined.
G Operation
1. Turn off the power.
2. Turn on the power while holding down the button 6 and
MON (ESC) button.
“Admin Password” will appear on the LCD to enter the
password.
3. Enter the administrator password.
The password entered will be displayed as “∗” marks.
Notes:
• The factory default is “650”.
• To delete a character, press the CLEAR button.
4. Press the CAM (SET) button.
If the password entered is correct, "Baud Rate" setting
form will appear on the LCD.
Notes:
• If the password entered is wrong, “PS·Data Com.
Setup” will appear on the LCD again to reenter the
password.
• You can change the setting item display on the LCD
by rotating the JogDial.
All Reset
Admin Password _____
All Reset
Admin Password ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗
All Reset All Reset
All Reset
End

PS Data Com. Setup
Admin Password _____

PS Data Com. Setup
Admin Password ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗

PS Data Com. Setup
Baud Rate 9600
28
System unit group address
(No need for setup) Remain the factory default.
6. Perform the settings.
Setting procedures differ depends on items. Refer to p.
28 to 30 for how to operate.
7. After you have completed the settings, turn off the
power.
G Baud Rate Setting
1. Select “Baud Rate” by rotating the JogDial.
(Refer to Step 5 in Operation.)
2. Press the CAM (SET) button.
The LCD display will change from the display mode to
the editing mode.
3. Select a desired parameter by rotating the JogDial, or
pressing the + or – button.
You can select the desired parameter from “19200”,
“9600”, and “4800”. The factory default is “9600”.
Note: Conform this parameter to the baud rate of other
system units. Otherwise, communication will not be
established between the system controller and sys-
tem units.
4. Press the MON (ESC) button.
The selected parameter will be determined, and the
LCD display will return from the editing mode to the dis-
play mode.

PS Data Com. Setup
Baud Rate 4800
5. Select an item you wish to set up by rotating the
JogDial.
Baud rate
The speed of communication between the system controller
and other system units
Parity bit
The parity bit, added to the data, to perform parity check
(Refer to p. 29 for details.)
Stop bit
The stop bit, added to the last of data, in asynchronous
communication (Refer to p. 29 for details.)
Wait time
The wait time until the data is sent again (Refer to p. 29 for
details.)
Controller group address
(No need for setup) Remain the factory default.

PS Data Com. Setup
Sys G—Adr.

PS Data Com. Setup
Baud Rate 9600

PS Data Com. Setup
Baud Rate 4800

PS Data Com. Setup
Wait Time Off

PS Data Com. Setup
Stop Bit 1

PS Data Com. Setup
Cnt G—Adr. A

PS Data Com. Setup
Baud Rate 9600

PS Data Com. Setup
Parity Bit None
29
4. Press the MON (ESC) button.
The selected parameter will be determined, and the
LCD display will return from the editing mode to the dis-
play mode.
G Wait Time Setting
1. Select “Wait Time” by rotating the JogDial.
(Refer to Step 5 in p. 28 Operation.)
2. Press the CAM (SET) button.
The LCD display will change from the display mode to
the editing mode.
3. Select a desired parameter by rotating the JogDial or
pressing the + or – button.
You can select the desired parameter from “Off”, “100
(msec)”, “200”, “400”, and “1000”.
4. Press the MON (ESC) button.
The LCD display will return from the editing mode to the
display mode, and the selected parameter will be
determined.
G Parity Bit Setting
1. Select “Parity Bit” by rotating the JogDial.
(Refer to Step 5 in p. 28 Operation.)
2. Press the CAM (SET) button.
The LCD display will change from the display mode to
the editing mode.
3. Select a desired parameter by rotating the JogDial or
pressing the + or – button.
You can select the desired parameter from “None”,
“Odd”, and “Even”. The factory default is “None”.
4. Press the MON (ESC) button.
The selected parameter will be determined, and the
LCD display will return from the editing mode to the dis-
play mode.
G Stop Bit Setting
1. Select “Stop Bit” by rotating the JogDial.
(Refer to Step 5 in p. 28 Operation.)
2. Press the CAM (SET) button.
The LCD display will change from the display mode to
the editing mode.
3. Select a desired parameter by rotating the JogDial or
pressing the + or – button.
You can select the desired parameter from “1” (bit) and
“2”. The factory default is “1”.

PS Data Com. Setup
Parity Bit None

PS Data Com. Setup
Stop Bit 2

PS Data Com. Setup
Wait Time Off

PS Data Com. Setup
Wait Time 100

PS Data Com. Setup
Stop Bit 1

PS Data Com. Setup
Stop Bit 2

PS Data Com. Setup
Parity Bit None

PS Data Com. Setup
Parity Bit Even

PS Data Com. Setup
Parity Bit Even

PS Data Com. Setup
Wait Time 100
30
G Group Address Setting for System
Controller
Note: Remain the factory default. When you have mistaken-
ly changed the setting, recover the factory default as
follows.
1. Select “Cnt G-Adr.” by rotating the JogDial.
(Refer to Step 5 in p. 28 Operation.)
2. Press the CAM (SET) button.
The LCD display will change from the display mode to
the editing mode.
3. Select a desired parameter by rotating the JogDial or
pressing the + or – button.
You can select the desired parameter from “A” to “Z”.
The factory default is “A”.
4. Press the MON (ESC) button.
The selected parameter will be determined, and the
LCD display will return to the display mode.
G Group Address Setting for System
Units
Note: Remain the factory default. When you have mistaken-
ly changed the setting, recover the factory default as
follows.
1. Select “Sys G-Adr.” by rotating the JogDial.
(Refer to Step 5 in p. 28 Operation.)
2. Press the CAM (SET) button.
The LCD display will change from the display mode to
the editing mode.
3. Select "A" by rotating the JogDial or pressing the + or –
button.
4. Press the CAM (SET) button.
The parameter will be determined, and the cursor will
jump to the sub parameter.
5. Enter the unit number of system unit by rotating the
JogDial or pressing the + or – button.
Note: 1 to 99 is available for the unit number. The facto-
ry default is 01.
6. Press the CAM (SET) button.
The sub parameter will be determined, and "OK" will
appear on the LCD.
After a second, the LCD display will return to the status
in Step 5.
If you set the unit numbers of other system units, repeat
Step 5.
Note: If the parameters cannot be determined, "NG" will
appear on the LCD. In this case, check the unit
number of system unit, and repeat Step 3 to 6.
7. Press the MON (ESC) button.
The LCD display will return to the status in Step 2.
8. Press the MON (ESC) button again.
The LCD display will return from the editing mode to the
display mode.

PS Data Com. Setup
Cnt G—Adr. B

PS Data Com. Setup
Cnt G—Adr. A

PS Data Com. Setup
Cnt G—Adr. A

PS Data Com. Setup
Sys G—Adr. B

PS Data Com. Setup
Sys G—Adr. A

PS Data Com. Setup
Sys G—Adr. A 05

PS Data Com. Setup
Sys G—Adr. A 01

PS Data Com. Setup
Sys G—Adr. A 01 OK
31
I To Change the Administrator
Password
You can change the administrator password. The factory
default is “650”.
G Operation
1. Turn off the power.
2. Turn on the power while holding down the button 1 and
MON (ESC) button.
“Admin Password” entry form will appear to perform the
setting.
3. Enter the current administrator password.
The password entered will be displayed as “∗” marks.
Notes:
• The factory default is “650”.
• To delete a character, press the CLEAR button.
4. Press the CAM (SET) button.
If the password entered is correct, “Old Password”
entry form will appear.
5. Enter the current administrator password again.
The password entered will be displayed as “∗” marks.
Note: To delete a character, press the CLEAR button.
6. Press the CAM (SET) button.
If the password entered is correct, “New Password”
entry form will appear.
Note: If the old password entered is wrong, the LCD
display will return to Step 4. Enter the old password
again.
7. Enter a new administrator password.
The password entered will be displayed as “∗” marks.
“1” to “99999” are available for the password.
8. Press the CAM (SET) button.
“New Password” entry form will appear again.
9. Enter the new administrator password again.
The password entered will be displayed as “∗” marks.
10. Press the CAM (SET) button.
The new password has been memorized in the system,
and “Memory” will appear on the LCD.
Then, “End” will appear on the LCD.
Note: If the new password entered is wrong, the LCD
display will return to Step 4. Enter the old password
again.
11. Turn off the power.
Admin Password Setup
Admin Password _____
Admin Password Setup
Old Password ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗
Admin Password Setup
New Password _____
Admin Password Setup
Memory
Admin Password Setup
New Password ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗
Admin Password Setup
New Password _____
Admin Password Setup
New Password ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗
Admin Password Setup
End
Admin Password Setup
Admin Password ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗
Admin Password Setup
Old Password _____
32
I PS·Data Database Copy
You can copy the database from the source system con-
troller (CONTROLLER NO. switch is set to 1.) to destination
system controllers (CONTROLLER NO. switch is set to 2 to
8.). When using two or more system controllers in the sys-
tem, you can copy the following settings.
• Administrator password
• Button functions and joystick button functions
(F1 to F8, A, B, and top buttons)
• Controller functions
(Time & Date Type)
(Auto Login)
(Operator Setup)
(Function Level)
(Camera Level)
(Cam Posi Map)
(Cam-Unit Map)
(HDD-Unit Map)
(LCD Title)
Notes:
• Database copy to two or more system controllers is
available at a time.
• To activate this mode, you need to perform the PS·Data
communication settings. (Refer to p. 27 PS·Data
Communication Setting.)
• This function is available only among WV-CU950/650
System Controllers. You cannot copy the PS·Data data-
base to other models, such as WV-CU360C.
• You cannot copy the database from Ver. 2.xx system
controllers to Ver. 1.xx system controllers. (Refer to
p. 36 Power-on for software version.)
If you try to copy the database, the LCD display will
become as follows, and the copying will be canceled.
G Operation
1. Turn off the power of source and destination system
controllers.
2. Disconnect the system units from source and destina-
tion system controllers.
3. Connect system controllers with modular cables.
4. Set the MODE switches of source and destination sys-
tem controllers to “PS·Data” mode.
5. Set the CONTROLLER NO. switch of source system
controller to “1”, and that of destination system con-
trollers to “2” to “8”.
(Refer to p. 25 CONTROLLER NO. Switch Setting.)
Note: Set a unique number for each system controller
to avoid conflict.
6. Turn on the power of destination system controller.
Login is not required.
7. Turn on the power of source system controller while
holding down the button 2 and MON (ESC) buttons.
“Admin Password” will appear on the LCD to enter the
password.
8. Enter the administrator password.
The password entered will be displayed as “∗” marks.
Note: The factory default is “650”.
9. Press the CAM (SET) button.
If the password entered is correct, the LCD display of
source system controller becomes as follows.
The LCD display of destination system controller(s)
become(s) as follows.
10. Press the CAM (SET) button of the source system con-
troller.
The database copy will be started, and the LCD display
of source system controller becomes as follows.
The LCD display of destination system controller(s)
become(s) as follows.
Data Base Tx Mode
“Enter SET Button”
Data Base Rx Mode
Data Base Tx Mode
Completed 60%
Data Base Rx Mode
Completed 60%
Data Base Copy Mode
Admin Password _____
Data Base Copy Mode
Admin Password ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗
Data Base Rx Mode
Failed Sum=0000
33
11. When the copy has been completed, the check sum
(SUM=nnnn) appears on the LCD of each system con-
troller.
When the copy has been successfully completed, the
check sum is identical to each other.
The LCD display of source system controller becomes
as follows.
The LCD display of destination system controller(s)
becomes as follows.
Note: If the check sum is not identical, check the con-
nection of all the controllers, and retry the data base
copy.
12. Turn off the power of source and destination system
controllers.
I PS·Data Operator Password Check
In case operators have forgotten their passwords, the
administrator can check the passwords in the following pro-
cedure.
G Operation
1. Turn off the power.
2. Turn on the power of system controller while holding
down the button 4 and MON (ESC) button.
“Admin Password” will appear on the LCD to enter the
password.
3. Enter the administrator password.
The password entered will be displayed as “∗” marks.
Notes:
• The factory default is “650”.
• If the password entered is wrong, the LCD display
will return to Step 2.
PSD Password Check
Admin Password _____
PSD Password Check
Admin Password ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗
4. Press the CAM (SET) button.
If the password entered is correct, “User ID” and
“Password” of Operator 1 will appear on the LCD while
you are holding down the buttons.
5. To search a desired operator, rotate the JogDial.
The user ID and password of Operator 1 to 16 will
appear interchangeably.
6. Turn off the power.
Operator 1 information
Rotate the JogDial.
Rotate the JogDial.
Operator 2 information
Operator 16 information


Rotate the JogDial.
No.01 User ID 650
Password 650
No.02 User ID 1
Password 12345
No.16 User ID 100
Password 100
Data Base Rx Mode
Completed Sum=1733
Data Base Tx Mode
Completed Sum=1733
No.01 User ID 650
Password 650
34
35
OPERATING PROCEDURES
(PS·DATA)
36
BEFORE OPERATION
I Power-on
Before operation, confirm the system composition.
Depending on system composition, some functions may be
unavailable.
1. Plug the supplied AC adapter into an AC 120 V outlet.
2. Insert the DC 9 V plug into the DC 9 V Input Jack at the
rear panel.
The power will be turned on. Then, the OPERATE indi-
cator will light up, and the software version → controller
number → login standby display will appear on the
LCD.
Ver.2.00
PS·Data Mode
Controller No.1
PS·Data Mode
No User
(Lighting for 2.0 seconds)
(Lighting for 1.0 second)
(Lighting until login)
Software version appears.
Power is turned on.
Controller number appears.
Login standby display appears.
I Power-off
After operation, power off the system controller as follows.
1. Log out from the system. (Refer to p. 40.)
2. Unplug the AC adapter from the AC outlet.
The power will be turned off. Then, the OPERATE indi-
cator will go out.
When leaving away from the system controller
for a long time
Log out of the system and unplug the AC adapter from the
AC outlet. If the AC adapter is kept plugged into the AC
outlet, the adapter will consume electricity even after the
DC 9 V plug is removed from the DC 9 V Input Jack.
DC9V IN
AC outlet
AC adapter
DC 9 V Input Jack
Clamp
(Fastens the supplied
AC adapter's
power cord.)
DC 9 V plug
37
I Basic Operation Flow
System Unit Selection
Monitor Selection
Camera Selection
System Unit
Setup and Operation
Camera setup
and control
S
y
s
t
e
m

O
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
Login
Logout
Unit selection
Monitor
selection
Camera
selection
Logout at the
end of
operation
A
l
a
r
m

s
u
s
p
e
n
s
i
o
n

o
r

r
e
s
e
t
Operation
(Multiscreen segment
switching and sequence
Operation
(Panning, Tilting,
and zooming, etc.)
Login
38
G Button Buzzer Setting
You will perform the setting whether to activate a sound
when a button is pressed. Select the desired parameter by
rotating the JogDial.
Notes:
• Off or On is selectable. The factory default is On.
• If set to On, short buzzer will sound three times in the
following occasions.
(p. 17) Invalid, Prohibited
(p. 73) Level 1 Fixed
I Operation Start (Login)
Before starting operation, user authentication by the ID and
password is required. (Refer to p. 72 Operator Registration
or Change for details on the setting of ID and password.)
Notes:
• User authentication is skipped when the auto login is
set to ON. (Refer to p. 71.)
• If no operation has been performed for 5 seconds or
more, the LCD display will return to the login standby
display.
• The factory default of operator information is as follows.
1. Turn on the power. (Refer to p. 36 Power-on and Power-
off.)
2. Wait until the login standby display appears.
3. Press the CAM (SET) button. “User ID” entry form will
appear on the LCD.
I LCD/Buzzer Adjustment
You can perform the settings of LCD brightness, LCD con-
trast, alarm buzzer, or button buzzer as follows.
1. Press the ADJUST button to select a desired menu.
Every pressing the button will display the brightness
setting menu → contrast setting menu → alarm buzzer
setting menu → button buzzer setting menu inter-
changeably.
Note: If no adjustment has been performed for 5 sec-
onds or more, these setting menus will automatical-
ly disappear and the LCD will return to the default
status.
2. After adjustment, press the MON (ESC) or EXIT button.
The LCD display will return to the default status.
G Brightness Level Adjustment
You can change the brightness level by rotating the
JogDial.
Adjust the LCD brightness level while watching the LCD.
Note: 1 (lowest) to 20 (highest) are available. The factory
default is 14.
G Contrast Level Adjustment
You can change the contrast level by rotating the JogDial.
Adjust the contrast level while watching the LCD.
Note: 1 (highest) to 20 (lowest) are available. The factory
default is 9.
G Alarm Buzzer Setting
You can change the duration time of alarm buzzer sound
by rotating the JogDial. Adjust the alarm buzzer setting
while watching the LCD.
Note: OFF, 1s (second), 2s, 3s, 4s, …, 30s, 40s, 50s, and
60s are available. The factory default is 2s.
LCD Bright 14
LCD Contrast 9
Buzzer Alarm 2s
Buzzer Operation On
User ID _____
PS·Data Mode
No User
Operator
No.
User ID Password Function
level
Camera
level
1 650 650 1 1
2 1 12345 1 1
3 100 100 2 1
4 101 101 3 1
5 102 102 3 1
6 103 103 3 1
39
Notes:
• The smallest monitor, camera, and unit numbers are
displayed on the LCD.
• Three seconds after the unit number was deter-
mined, model number appears in place of unit num-
ber.
• When the ID or password is wrong, “Invalid” blinks
on the LCD. Then, the LCD returns to the login
standby display.
• When a system controller cannot communicate
properly with a system unit, the LCD display after
login becomes as follows.
In this case, check the connection and settings
between the system controller and system unit.
(Refer to p. 20.)
4. Enter the ID number by pressing the numeric buttons.
The user ID entered will appear on the LCD.
Notes:
• To delete a character, press the CLEAR button.
• You can also enter your user ID without pressing
the CAM (SET) button.
5. Press the CAM (SET) button. When the ID number is
correct, “Password” entry form appears on the LCD.
6. Enter the password by pressing the numeric buttons.
Then, press the CAM (SET) button.
Notes:
• To delete a character, press the CLEAR button.
• The password entered will be displayed as “∗”
marks.
7. When the password is correct, “Login OK” appears on
the LCD. Then, the LCD changes to the operation dis-
play.
Invalid
PS Data Mode
No User

Login OK
Mon04 Cam128 Unit16
F1 F2 F3 F4
Mon04 Cam128 HD316
F1 F2 F3 F4
User ID 650
Password _____
User ID 650
Password __∗ ∗ ∗
User ID __650
Mon-- Cam--- Unit01
Unit Error
40
I If You Have Forgotten the Login
Password
Refer to the system administrator.
I Operation Start (Auto Login)
When auto login is set to ON, operators can log into the
system without entering their passwords. The LCD display
after power-on becomes as follows. (Refer to p. 71 Auto
Login/Logout Setup for details on the setting.)
1. When the power is turned on, “Auto Login” appears on
the LCD for a second.
2. The user ID of auto login user appear on the LCD.
Then, the operator will log into the system automatically.
Notes:
• This illustration is an example in which the operator
number is “650”.
• The smallest monitor, camera, and unit numbers are
displayed on the LCD.
• Three seconds after the unit number was deter-
mined, model number appears in place of unit num-
ber.
• Due to security, the password is not displayed on
the LCD.
I Operation End (Logout)
You need to log out of the system:
• When finishing operation and turning off the power
• When changing an operator
1. During the login status, press the MON LOCK/LOGOUT
button while holding down the SHIFT button.
2. You will log out of the system, and "Logout" will appear
on the LCD. Then, the LCD returns to the login standby
display.
Alarm sign after logout
If power is being supplied even after logout, the current
system status will be continuously informed by “Alarm sign”
and the ALM SUSPEND indicator. If an alarm is newly acti-
vated after logout, “Alarm” sign will blink. (The blinking will
change to steady light when the alarm is automatically
reset.)
PS Data Mode
Auto Login

Mon01 Cam128 Unit16
F1 F2 F3 F4
Mon01 Cam128 HD316
F1 F2 F3 F4
PS·Data Mode
User ID = 650
PS·Data Mode
No User
Logout
41
I Recorder Selection
Notes:
• In advance, you need to set HDD-unit maps. (Refer to
p. 78 Associating Recorder Numbers with Unit
Numbers.)
• In the factory default, Recorder 1 to 16 is associated
with Unit 1 to 16.
1. Enter a recorder number by pressing numeric buttons.
The entered number will appear on the LCD.
2. Press the RECORDER/UNIT button. The system will
become ready for control, and the monitor number,
camera number, and system unit number will appear on
the LCD.
Notes:
• Three seconds after, model number will appear in
place of unit number.
• If you have entered a wrong recorder number,
“Invalid” will appear on the LCD. Then, the LCD will
return to the status before the recording selection.
To control the system, you need to select a desired unit
(system unit, recorder, monitor, or camera) at the begin-
ning.
I System Unit Selection
Notes:
• In advance, you need to set the unit number for each
system unit. (Refer to the operating instructions of sys-
tem units.)
• 1 to 99 are available for the unit number.
1. Enter a unit number by pressing the numeric buttons.
The entered number will appear on the LCD.
2. Press the RECORDER/UNIT button while holding down
the SHIFT button. The system will become ready for
control. Then, the monitor number, camera number,
and system unit number will appear on the LCD.
Note: Three seconds after, model number will appear
in place of unit number. To display the unit number
again, hold down the RECORDER/UNIT.
• If you have entered a wrong unit number, “Invalid”
will appear on the LCD. Then, the LCD will return to
the status before the system unit selection.
UNIT SELECTION
Mon01 Cam016 ___16
F1 F2 F3 F4
Mon02 Cam128 ____2
F1 F2 F3 F4
Mon02 Cam016 HD316
F1 F2 F3 F4
Invalid
Invalid
Mon02 Cam016 Unit16
F1 F2 F3 F4
Mon02 Cam016 Unit16
F1 F2 F3 F4
Mon02 Cam016 HD316
F1 F2 F3 F4
42
Note: If camera numbers are associated with unit num-
bers, you can skip system unit selection. In the fac-
tory default, Camera 1 to 64 is associated with Unit
1 to 4. (Refer to p. 77 Associating Camera Numbers
with Unit Numbers.)
2. Select a camera number by pressing the numeric but-
tons. The entered number will appear on the LCD.
Notes:
• Refer to the operating instructions of system unit for
available camera numbers.
• You can also select cameras by pressing the + or –
button. When pressing the + button, the monitor will
display the image of camera with the higher chan-
nel number. When pressing the – button, the moni-
tor will display the image of camera with the lower
channel number.
3. Press the CAM (SET) button. The system will become
ready for control. Then, the camera number will appear
on the LCD, and the image of selected camera will be
displayed on the active monitor.
Note: If you have entered a wrong camera number
(other than 1 to 999), “Invalid” will appear on the
LCD. Then, the LCD will return to the status before
selecting the camera.
Signs displayed on the LCD
“Seq”: This sign is displayed when a sequence is acti-
vated.
“Seq-P”: This sign is displayed when a sequence is
paused.
“C-Pnnn*”: This sign is displayed when a camera posi-
tion is selected. (Camera position is the combina-
tion of camera number and preset position num-
ber.) * nnn is a camera position number.
I Monitor Selection
When two or more monitors are connected to a system unit,
you can select a desired monitor.
When monitor selection is unavailable, “Mon- -“ appears on
the LCD. The selected system unit does not support moni-
tor selection.
1. Select a system unit (including a recorder) connected
to a monitor you wish to control. (Refer to p. 41 System
Unit Selection.)
2. Select the desired monitor number by pressing the
numeric buttons. The entered number will appear on
the LCD.
Note: Refer to the operating instructions of system unit
for available monitor numbers.
3. Press the MON (ESC) button. The monitor number will
appear on the LCD. The system will become ready for
monitor control.
Note: If you have entered a wrong monitor number,
“Invalid” will appear on the LCD. Then, the LCD will
return to the status before the monitor selection.
I Camera Selection
When two or more cameras are connected to a system unit,
you can select a desired camera. You will also perform
camera selection when changing camera channels.
1. Select a system unit and monitor connected to a cam-
era you wish to control. (Refer to p. 41 System Unit
Selection and Monitor Selection in this page.)
Mon01 Cam016 HD316
F1 F2 F3 F4
Mon01 Cam001 ___16
F1 F2 F3 F4
Mon01 Cam016 ___16
F1 F2 F3 F4
Mon02 Cam016 HD316
F1 F2 F3 F4
Invalid
Mon02 Cam016 HD316
Mon01 Cam016 HD316
Invalid
Mon01 Cam016 HD316
F1 F2 F3 F4
Mon01 Cam001 HD316
F1 F2 F3 F4
43
Note: Available zooming rates differ depending on sys-
tem units. (Refer to the operating instructions of sys-
tem units for details.)
I Tour Sequence/Group Sequence
Sequence monitoring is the function to switch camera
images automatically, according to the order registered in
the system unit. The following procedure is available when
a selected system unit has the tour or group sequence
monitoring function.
Note: Before performing the procedure, the sequence
setup of system unit is required.
1. Select a system unit and monitor. (Refer to p. 41
System Unit Selection and p. 42 Monitor Selection.)
2. Enter a desired sequence number.
3. To activate a tour sequence, press the TOUR
SEQ/GROUP SEQ button.
To activate a group sequence, press the TOUR
SEQ/GROUP SEQ button while holding down the SHIFT
button. The sequence will be activated, and “Seq” will
appear on the monitor, in place of the camera number.
Notes:
• If you have skipped entering the sequence number
in Step 2, Tour or Group Sequence 1 will be activat-
ed.
• If the selected recorder supports sequence paus-
ing, you can pause the sequence by pressing the
SEQ PAUSE/SEQ STOP button. During the
sequence pause, “Seq-P” will appear on the LCD in
place of “Seq”.
4. To quit the sequence monitoring, press the SEQ
PAUSE/SEQ STOP while holding down the SHIFT but-
ton. The monitor display will return to the spot mode.
Note: If the selected system unit does not support
sequence stop, stop the sequence by selecting a
camera or activating the multiscreen display. (Refer
to p. 42 Camera Selection or Multiscreen Display in
this page.)
The following are the procedures to control system units
(including recorders).
I Multiscreen Display
The following procedure is available when a selected sys-
tem unit (for example, a hard disk recorder) has the multi-
screen display function.
1. Select a system unit and monitor. (Refer to p. 41
System Unit Selection and p. 42 Monitor Selection.)
2. Do either of the following.
• Press the MULTI SCREEN button.
• Press the desired numeric buttons (refer to the dia-
gram), then press the MULTI SCREEN button.
Images will be displayed in the specified multiscreen
segment pattern on the monitor. Every pressing the
MULTI SCREEN button can change the multiscreen
segment pattern.
Numeric buttons Multiscreen display pattern
0 4 segments
1 7 segments
2 9 segments
3 10 segments
4 13 segments
5 16 segments
Note: Available multiscreen segment patterns differ
depending on system units. Refer to the operating
instructions of system units.
I Electronic Zooming
The following procedure is available when a selected sys-
tem unit has the electronic zooming function.
1. Select a system unit, monitor, and camera. (Refer to p.
41 System Unit Selection, p. 42 Monitor Selection, and
p. 42 Camera Selection)
2. Press the EL-ZOOM button. The camera image on the
monitor will be zoomed. Every pressing the EL-ZOOM
button can change the zooming rate.
3. To move the zoomed area, move the 3D joystick to
desired directions. (Refer to the operating instructions
of system unit.)
SYSTEM UNIT CONTROL
Mon02 Seq HD316
F1 F2 F3 F4
44
I On-screen Display (OSD)
Control
You can toggle the OSD information (display parameters
such as camera title, monitor number, and recorder num-
ber) on the active monitor screen.
1. Select a desired monitor. (Refer to p. 42 Monitor
Selection.)
2. To toggle the OSD information, press the OSD button.
Note: OSD information differs depending on system
units. Refer to the operating instructions of system
units.
I System Function Control
You can recall system functions (functions of system units)
by pressing the corresponding function numbers. Refer to
the operating instructions of system units for the association
of function numbers and system functions.
1. Select a system unit and monitor. (Refer to p. 41
System Unit Selection and p. 42 Monitor Selection.)
2. Enter a function number by pressing the numeric but-
tons.
3. Press the CAM FUNC/SYS FUNC button while holding
down the SHIFT button.
The associated system function will be activated.
Note: If you assign system functions to the joystick function
buttons (A, B, and top buttons), you can recall system
functions by pressing these buttons. Refer to p. 57
MENU FUNCTION DESCRIPTIONS for details.
Mon01 Cam001 ____3
F1 F2 F3 F4
45
From this system controller, you can control the following
functions of digital disk recorders supporting PS·Data. You
will control a recorder in the status in which a recorder has
been selected.
Note: Some parts of monitor displays, described on this
document, may differ from the actual status.
I Manual Recording
1. To start the recording, press the REC button.
Recording will be started.
2. To stop the recording, press the REC button again for
two seconds.
Note:
Refer to the operating instructions of recorder for the
available recording modes and total recording time.
I Playback
1. Select a desired recorder.
Refer to p. 41 Recorder Selection.
2. Select a camera whose picture you wish to play back.
Refer to p. 42 Camera Selection.
When camera selection is not necessary, skip to Step 3.
3. To start playback, press the PLAY/PAUSE button.
The playback will be started.
Note: The playback start point differs depending on
recorders. (Refer to the operating instructions of
recorder.)
Operations available during playback
Pause: Refer to p. 11 , Play/Pause button.
Single frame skip (Forward or backward field
advance): Refer to p. 11 , JogDial.
Fast forward or fast reverse (Fast-forward or
rewind): Refer to p. 11 , Shuttle ring.
Hold playback speed: Refer to p. 12 , Shuttle hold
button.
Skip (WJ-HD300 and WJ-HD500 Series): Refer to p.
11 , JogDial.
Play the latest recorded image (WJ-HD300 Series
only): Refer to p. 11 ] Go to last button.
Multiscreen display: Refer to p. 11 ] Multiscreen
selection button.
Marking (WJ-HD300 Series only): Refer to p. 11 ]
Mark button.
4. To stop playback, press the STOP button.
The playback will be stopped.
I Search Playback
Recorders have search playback functions based on
recording times or recording events. When searching play-
back images, you can activate these functions from this
system controller.
Notes:
• WJ-HD100 Series does not support search playback.
• WJ-HD300 Ver. 1.2 or later / WJ-HD200 Ver. 1.24 or
later / WJ-HD220 supports search playback.
G How to Display Search Lists
1. Press the SEARCH/T&D SEARCH button. “Search
Mode” menu will appear on the LCD, and a search list
(date-and-time entry form, record list, or recording
event list, etc.) will be displayed on an active monitor.
Notes:
• Every pressing the SEARCH/T&D SEARCH button
can change search list display. (For example,
Record list →Thumbnail Display →Record List …)
• The search list firstly displayed differs depending
on recorders.
2. Perform operations while watching the active monitor.
Note: The operation details differ depending on
recorders. Refer to pp. 46 to 48.
RECORDER CONTROL
Search Mode HD300
Thumb Text Copy
F1 F2 F3 F4
Example: WJ-HD300 Series
46
Note: While holding down the SHIFT button, the LCD dis-
play will become as follows.
Available buttons and functions
F1 button: Thumb or List
Changes the monitor display between the recording event
list window and thumbnail menu.
F3 button: Text
Displays text information of selected event on the recording
event list.
F4 button: Copy
Displays the DATA COPY window while the recording
event, VMD search, or marking list window is displayed.
F1 button while holding down the SHFT button: Nr-A
Specifies the normal or event recording area for the play-
back media.
F2 button while holding down the SHIFT button: Cp-A
Specifies the copy area for the playback media.
F3 button while holding down the SHIFT button: Cpy1
Specifies the external recording device connected to COPY
1 for the playback media. (This button is available for WJ-
HD316A and WJ-HD309.)
F4 button while holding down the SHIFT button: Cpy2
Specifies the external recording device connected to COPY
2 for the playback media. (This button is available for WJ-
HD316A and WJ-HD309.)
Notes:
• The monitor display is not changed even if pressing the
F1 button while the date-and-time entry form is dis-
played.
• To close the monitor display activated by the function
buttons, press the MON (ESC) button.
• The DATA COPY window is not displayed while a
thumbnail window is displayed.
• Refer to the operating instructions of recorder for details
on each function.
Controls commonly available
<Main unit>
Shuttle ring clockwise: Moves to the next page.
Shuttle ring counterclockwise: Moves to the previous
page.
JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise: Changes the
selected parameter.
Numeric buttons: Enters numeric parameters.
CAM (SET) button: Determines the selected parameter
or searching filter setting.
MON (ESC) or EXIT button: Closes the search list dis-
play.
<3D joystick unit>
3D joystick upward (L): Moves the cursor.
3D joystick downward (M): Moves the cursor.
3D joystick to the left (t): Moves the cursor to the left.
3D joystick to the right (s): Moves the cursor to the
right.
Zoom wheel controller to the right or left: Changes
the search list display. (For example, Record list ↔
Thumbnail Display ↔Record List …)
Top button: Determines the selected parameter or
searching filter setting.
G Operation (WJ-HD300 Series)
If you press the SEARCH/T&D SEARCH button, the date-
and-time entry form will appear on the monitor. The search
list display will change as follows.
Date-and-time entry form → Recording event list → VMD
search list →Marking list →Date-and-time entry form →…
Note: To quit search playback, press the MON (ESC) or
EXIT button. Live image will be displayed again on the
monitor.
The following are the details on LCD display patterns and
function buttons.
LCD display while the event list is displayed
on the monitor
LCD display while the thumbnail menu is
displayed on the monitor
Search Mode HD300
Thumb Text Copy
F1 F2 F3 F4
Search Mode HD300
List Text Copy
F1 F2 F3 F4
Search Mode HD300
Nr-A Cp-A Cpy1 Cpy2
F1 F2 F3 F4
47
Example of searching filter display and
settings
1. Repeat pressing the SEARCH/T&D SEARCH button to
display the recording event list window.
2. To select “CAMERA” for the searching filter, move the
3D joystick to right or left.
3. To determine the filter setting, press the CAM (SET) but-
ton of main unit or top button of 3D joystick unit.
The searching filter window will appear on the active
monitor, and the selected camera channels will be dis-
played on the window.
Note: When you press the MON (ESC) button, the
searching filter window will be closed.
4. To select a desired camera channel, move the 3D joy-
stick to right of left.
5. To change the filter setting, do either of the following.
• Rotate the JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise.
• Press the + or – button.
The selected camera channels will turn to blue, and
other channels will be displayed in gray.
Note: To change the filter settings of two or more cam-
era channels, repeat Step 5.
6. Press the CAM (SET) button of main unit or top button
of 3D joystick unit.
The associated recording event will be displayed on the
monitor.
G Operation (WJ-HD500 Series)
If you press the SEARCH/T&D SEARCH button, the date-
and-time entry form will appear on the monitor. The search
list display will change as follows.
Record List →Thumbnail Display →Record List →…
Note: To quit search playback, press the MON (ESC) or
EXIT button. Live image will be displayed again on the
monitor.
The following are the details on LCD display patterns and
function buttons.
LCD display
Available buttons and functions
F1 button: Edit
You will press this button when editing the Search
Editing Area on the Record List.
F2 button: Group
The selected group is switched by rotation.
F3 button: Alm
Only the Alarm and Emergency Record List will be dis-
played on the monitor.
F4 button: Copy
The selected recording images will be copied to a
external recording device (DVD or CD-R).
F1 button while holding down the SHIFT button: Drive
Record List of external recording device will be dis-
played. The LCD display becomes as follows.
Note: Refer to the operating instructions of recorder for
details on each function.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
CAMERA FILTERING
CAMERA
SET : [ SET ] CANCEL : [ ESC ]
Search Mode HD500
Edit Group Alm Copy
F1 F2 F3 F4
Search Mode HD500
Drive
F1 F2 F3 F4
TIME&DATE
01ch
01ch
01ch
01ch
01ch
01ch
01ch
01ch
MANUAL
MANUAL
MANUAL
MANUAL
MANUAL
MANUAL
MANUAL
MANUAL
CAM REC EVT
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP
TEXT
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM
TIME&DATE SEARCH REC EVENT SEARCH VMD SEARCH MARK
TIME&DATE CAMERA REC EVENT TEXT UNLOCK FILTER
TOTAL APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 100
TIME&DATE
01ch
01ch
01ch
01ch
01ch
01ch
01ch
01ch
MANUAL
MANUAL
MANUAL
MANUAL
MANUAL
MANUAL
MANUAL
MANUAL
CAM REC EVT
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP
TEXT
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM
TIME&DATE SEARCH REC EVENT SEARCH VMD SEARCH MARK
TIME&DATE CAMERA REC EVENT TEXT UNLOCK FILTER
TOTAL APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 100
48
Example of F1 button use
1. Press the SEARCH/T&D SEARCH button. Record List
will be displayed on the active monitor.
2. Press the F1 button.
Search Editing Area will appear on the Record List.
3. Move the cursor to a position to be edited by perform-
ing either of the following.
• Move the 3D joystick controller to the right or left.
• Rotate the shuttle ring clockwise or counterclock-
wise.
4. Enter the desired date and time by performing either of
the following.
• Rotate the JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise.
• Press the + or – button.
5. Repeat Step 3 and 4 to edit Search Editing Area.
6. After editing, press the CAM (SET) button.
The associated record will be displayed on the Record
List.
G Operation (WJ-HD200 Series)
The following is the LCD display and operating procedure
of search playback.
LCD display
Operating procedure
1. Press the SEARCH/T&D SEARCH button. The time & date
search window will be displayed on the active monitor.
2. Move the cursor to a position to be edited by perform-
ing either of the following.
• Move the 3D joystick controller to the right or left.
• Rotate the shuttle ring clockwise or counterclock-
wise.
3. Enter the desired date and time by performing either of
the following.
• Rotate the JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise.
• Press the + or – button.
4. Press the PLAY/PAUSE button or CAM (SET) button.
The specified playback image will be displayed on the
monitor.
Notes:
• To quit search playback, press the MON (ESC) or EXIT
button. Live image will be displayed again on the moni-
tor.
• You will use no function buttons for controlling the
recorder.
• Image to be played back differs depending on
recorders. (Refer to the operating instructions of
recorder.)
Search Mode HD200
03-05-07 20:30:00
TO SEARCH PUSH PLAY KEY
010009
DATE MAY29.00
G2
G1
23:59:59 T/L
22:15:40 M/S ALM-TRM12
O/S ALM-VMD3
T/L
T/L ALM-TRM1
M/S ALM-PC4
T/L EMR
T/L MAN
2343RECORD) (TOTAL
21:00:07
17:33:05
7:23:11
6:59:44
8:55:28
0:01:28
G3
ALL
ALL
G4
ALL
G3
010008
010007
010006
010005
010004
010003
010002
GROUP NO TIME REC-MODE
ALL GROUP
MAY29.00 SEARCH: 9:31 G1
SEL:←→ CHG:+– EXE:SET ESC:FSTOP
COPY DONE! LEFT:20%
PLAY:B ESC:FSTOP SEL:JOG
SEARCH:DISPLAY
DATE MAY29.00
GROUP NO TIME
ALL GROUP
010009 G2
G1
23:59:59 T/L
22:15:40 M/S ALM-TRM12
O/S ALM-VMD3
T/L
T/L ALM-TRM1
M/S ALM-PC4
T/L EMR
T/L MAN
2343RECORD) (TOTAL
21:00:07
17:33:05
7:23:11
6:59:44
8:55:28
0:01:28
G3
ALL
ALL
G4
ALL
G3
010008
010007
010006
010005
010004
010003
010002
REC-MODE
Search Editing Area
010009
DATE MAY29.00
G2
G1
23:59:59 T/L
22:15:40 M/S ALM-TRM12
O/S ALM-VMD3
T/L
T/L ALM-TRM1
M/S ALM-PC4
T/L EMR
T/L MAN
2343RECORD) (TOTAL
21:00:07
17:33:05
7:23:11
6:59:44
8:55:28
0:01:28
G3
ALL
ALL
G4
ALL
G3
010008
010007
010006
010005
010004
010003
010002
GROUP NO TIME REC-MODE
ALL GROUP
MAY29.00 SEARCH: 0:01 G1
SEL:←→ CHG:+– EXE:SET ESC:FSTOP
49
I Time & Date Search Playback
You can search playback images by entering a desired
recording date and time.
Note: To cancel the entry, press the MON (ESC) or EXIT
button. The LCD display will return to the normal status.
1. Press the T & D SEARCH button while holding down the
SHIFT button. The time-and-date entry form will appear
on the LCD.
Note: You can change the display pattern setting.
(Refer to p. 71 Time & Date Search Display Pattern.)
2. Move the cursor to a position to be edited by perform-
ing either of the following.
• Move the 3D joystick controller to the right or left.
• Rotate the shuttle ring clockwise or counterclock-
wise.
3. Enter the desired date and time by by performing either
of the following.
• Rotate the JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise.
• Press the numeric buttons.
4. Press the PLAY/PAUSE or CAM (SET) button. The
image on the specified date and time will be played
back on the active monitor.
After the image has been played back, the LCD will
return to the default status.
When using WJ-HD500 Series
Group selection is required after Step 3. Perform as follows.
1. Press the PLAY/PAUSE or CAM (SET) button.
"Group Select" menu will appear on the LCD.
2. Select a desired group to play back by rotating the
JogDial.
3. Press the PLAY/PAUSE or CAM (SET) button again.
The image on the specified date and time will be
played back on the active monitor.
Mmm/DD/YYYY HH:MM 12
Mar/16/2004 01:32 PM
Mmm/DD/YYYY HH:MM 12
Mar/17/2004 12:00 AM
HD500 Index Search
Group Select=All-G
Note: Image to be played back differ depending on
recorders. (Refer to the operating instructions of
recorder.)
I Other Available Functions
Depending on recorders, the following functions are avail-
able.
• Disk selection (WJ-HD300 Series only) (p. 67)
• A - B repeat playback setting (WJ-HD300 Series only)
(p. 67)
• Filtering ON/OFF (WJ-HD300 Series only) (p. 68)
• Displaying camera and playback image (WJ-HD500
Series only) (p. 68)
• Recorded-image copy (WJ-HD500 Series only) (p. 83)
• Alarm search (WJ-HD200 Series / WJ-HD100 Series) (p.
84)
50
You can control cameras from this system controller.
I Camera Panning/Tilting Control
The following procedure is available when panning/tilting
heads or combination cameras are connected to system
units.
1. Select a system unit, monitor, and desired camera.
(Refer to p. 41 System Unit Selection, p. 42 Monitor
Selection, and p. 42 Camera Selection.)
2. Move the 3D joystick to desired directions.
The selected camera will pan and tilt. If you move the
3D joystick widely, you can pan and tilt the camera
faster.
Note: Panning/tilting speed differs depending on cameras.
I Zooming Control
The following procedure is available when a motorized
zoom lens is attached to a camera.
1. Select a system unit, monitor, and desired camera.
(Refer to p. 41 System Unit Selection, p. 42 Monitor
Selection, and p. 42 Camera Selection.)
2. Move the zoom wheel controller (located at the top of
3D joystick).
• Turning the zoom wheel controller to the right will
zoom the image. (The zooming level will go up.)
• Turning the controller to the left will widen the
scene. (The zooming level will go down.)
Note: Available zooming rates differ depending on the
motorized zoom lens.
I Lens Iris Control
The following procedure is available when a selected cam-
era has an adjustable lens iris.
1. Select a system unit, monitor, and desired camera.
(Refer to p. 41 System Unit Selection, p. 42 Monitor
Selection, and p. 42 Camera Selection.)
2. Adjust the lens iris by pressing the IRIS OPEN or
CLOSE button of 3D joystick unit.
• Pressing the IRIS OPEN will open the lens iris.
• Pressing the IRIS CLOSE will close the lens iris.
To reset the lens iris to the default status
Press the A button of 3D joystick unit.
The lens iris will be adjusted automatically.
Note: As the factory default, iris reset has been assigned to
the A button. You can assign iris reset to the function
buttons (F1 to F4/F5 to F8) or joystick function buttons
(A, B, and top buttons). (Refer to p. 63 for assignment.)
I Lens Focus Control
The following procedure is available when a selected cam-
era has a lens whose focus is adjustable.
1. Select a system unit, monitor, and desired camera.
(Refer to p. 41 System Unit Selection, p. 42 Monitor
Selection, and p. 42 Camera Selection.)
2. Adjust the lens focus by pressing the FOCUS NEAR
and FAR buttons of 3D joystick unit.
• Pressing the FOCUS NEAR will bring the focus
nearer to the object.
• Pressing the FOCUS FAR will bring the focus farther
from the object.
To adjust the lens focus automatically
Press the B button of main unit or top button of 3D joystick
unit. The lens focus will be adjusted automatically for the
object displayed when you pressed the button.
Note: As the factory default, auto focus has been assigned
to the B button and top button. You can assign auto
focus to the function buttons (F1 to F4/F5 to F8) or joy-
stick function buttons (A, B, and top buttons). (Refer to
p. 63 for assignment.)
CAMERA CONTROL
WIDE TELE
Zoom wheel controller
51
I Preset Position Control
Preset position is the function to register camera monitoring
positions (preset positions) associated with position num-
bers. By entering the position numbers, you can move cam-
eras to the preset positions.
Note: To activate this function, you need to register the pre-
set positions of combination camera.
1. Select a system unit, monitor, and desired camera.
(Refer to p. 41 System Unit Selection, p. 42 Monitor
Selection, and p. 42 Camera Selection.)
2. Enter a preset position number by pressing the numeric
buttons. The entered number will appear on the LCD.
3. Press the PRESET/PGM PRESET button.
The camera will move to the registered preset position,
and the preset position image will be displayed on an
active monitor.
To register preset positions
1. Move the camera to a desired position by moving the
3D joystick.
2. Enter a preset position number you wish to register by
pressing the numeric buttons.
The entered number will appear on the LCD.
3. Press the PRESET/PGM PRESET button while holding
down the SHIFT button.
The preset position will be registered, and “Memory”
will appear on the LCD.
Note: If the registration have failed, “Invalid” will appear
on the LCD. (Example: When the selected camera
does not support preset position control)
I Home Position Control
Home position is the default preset position. You can move
the camera to the home position only by pressing the PRE-
SET/PGM PRESET button.
Note: To activate this function, you need to register the
home position of combination camera. (Refer to the
operating instructions of combination camera.)
1. Select a system unit, monitor, and desired camera.
(Refer to p. 41 System Unit Selection, p. 42 Monitor
Selection, and p. 42 Camera Selection.)
2. Press the PRESET/PGM PRESET button. The camera
will move to the registered home position, and the home
position image will be displayed on an active monitor.
Note: You can also move the camera to the home posi-
tion by pressing the button 0, and then the PRE-
SET/PGM PRESET button.
I Camera Function Control
You can recall the camera functions of combination cam-
eras by entering the function number from this system con-
troller. Refer to the operating instructions of combination
camera for the association of camera numbers and func-
tions.
1. Select a desired combination camera. (Refer to p. 42
Camera Selection.)
2. Enter a camera function number by pressing the
numeric buttons. The entered number will appear on
the LCD.
3. Press the CAM FUNC/SYS FUNC button.
The associated camera function will be activated.
Note: If you assign camera functions to the joystick function
buttons (A, B, and top buttons), you can recall the cam-
era functions by pressing these buttons. Refer to p. 57
MENU FUNCTION DESCRIPTIONS for details.
Mon02 Cam001 ____3
F1 F2 F3 F4
Mon02 Cam001 Pre003
F1 F2 F3 F4
Mon01 Cam001 ___12
F1 F2 F3 F4
Mon01 Cam001 Pre012
Memory
Mon01 Cam001 ____3
F1 F2 F3 F4
Mon01 Cam001 Pre012
Invalid
52
I Camera Position Control
Camera position is the association of camera numbers and
preset position numbers. Up to 1 000 camera positions are
registrable in the system, and you can move a desired
camera to a desired preset position only by entering a cam-
era position number.
Note: To activate this function, preset positions and camera
positions need to be registered. (Refer to p. 51 To reg-
ister preset positions and p. 76 Camera Position
Registration or Clearing.)
1. Select a system unit and monitor. (Refer to p. 41
System Unit Selection and p. 42 Monitor Selection.)
2. Enter a camera position number by pressing the numer-
ic buttons. The entered number will appear on the LCD.
3. Press the CAM POSI button.
The registered camera and preset position will be
selected, and the camera position image will be dis-
played on the active monitor.
I Camera Selection Recall
Every time you select a camera or camera position, this
system controller memorizes up to 10 steps of camera
selection. You can recall these operations in order or
reverse order. In the following procedure, you can track
back the camera images formerly displayed.
Note: After power-off or system unit selection, the
memorized camera operations will be cleared.
In the following example, Camera 1 → 3 → 128 has
been selected.
1. Press the – button while holding down the HISTORY
button. The camera image formerly selected will be dis-
played on an active monitor. (Camera 128 →3)
Note: To recall camera images more formerly selected
one by one, repeat pressing the – button while hold-
ing down the HISTORY button. (You can recall up to
10 camera images.)
2. To return to the camera image more recently selected,
press the + button while holding down the HISTORY
button. The camera image more recently selected will
be displayed on the monitor. (Camera 1 →3 →128)
Note: To return to the camera images more recently
selected one by one, repeat pressing the + button
while holding down the HISTORY button.
I Wiper Control
The following procedure is available when a selected cam-
era (housing) is equipped with a wiper.
1. Select a system unit, monitor, and desired camera.
(Refer to p. 41 System Unit Selection, p. 42 Monitor
Selection, and p. 42 Camera Selection.)
2. Keep pressing the WIPER button.
The wiper will be activated while this button is being
pressed.
Mon01 C-P011 HD316
F1 F2 F3 F4
Mon02 Cam128 HD316
F1 F2 F3 F4
Mon02 Cam003 HD316
F1 F2 F3 F4
Mon02 Cam001 HD316
F1 F2 F3 F4
Mon02 Cam001 HD316
F1 F2 F3 F4
Mon02 Cam003 HD316
F1 F2 F3 F4
Mon02 Cam128 HD316
F1 F2 F3 F4
Mon01 Cam001 ___11
F1 F2 F3 F4
53
I Defroster Control
The following procedure is available when a selected cam-
era (housing) is equipped with a defroster.
1. Select a system unit, monitor, and desired camera.
(Refer to p. 41 System Unit Selection, p. 42 Monitor
Selection, and p. 42 Camera Selection.)
2. Press the DEF ON/OFF button.
The defroster will be activated.
Note: The defroster will be automatically deactivated
after the specified time.
3. To deactivate the defroster, press the DEF ON/OFF but-
ton while holding down the SHIFT button.
I Auxiliary Control
You can control one or two auxiliary control devices. The
following procedure is available when an auxiliary control
device, such as Receiver WV-RC150, is connected to a
system unit.
Note: The operation procedure differs depending on the
mode setting (=latch or momentary mode) of auxiliary
control device.
G Operating Procedure (Latch mode)
1. Select a system unit, monitor, and camera an auxiliary
control device is connected to. (Refer to p. 41 System
Unit Selection, p. 42 Monitor Selection, and p. 42
Camera Selection.)
2. Press the AUX 1 ON/OFF or AUX 2 ON/OFF button.
The auxiliary control device, associated by the installa-
tion wiring, will be activated.
3. To quit the auxiliary control, press the AUX 1 ON/OFF or
AUX 2 ON/OFF button while holding down the SHIFT
button.
G Operating Procedure (Momentary
mode)
1. Select a system unit, monitor, and camera an auxiliary
control device is connected to. (Refer to p. 41 System
Unit Selection, p. 42 Monitor Selection, and p. 42
Camera Selection.)
2. Keep pressing the AUX 1 ON/OFF or AUX 2 ON/OFF
button.
The auxiliary control device, associated by the installa-
tion wiring, will be activated while this button is being
pressed.
I Other Functions
You can control the following functions by pressing the
function buttons (F1 to F8). Refer to p. 65 MENU FUNC-
TION DETAILS.
• Camera setup (p. 65)
• Auto mode (p. 65
• BW mode (p. 66)
• Patrol Learn (p. 66)
• Auto pan setup and activation (p. 67)
• Camera cleaning (p. 70)
• Camera function (p. 80)
• Auto pan (p. 81)
• Camera sequence (p. 81)
• Camera sort (p. 81)
• Patrol play (p. 81)
• Home position (p. 82)
• Auto focus (p. 82)
• Iris reset (p. 82)
• Camera +1 (p. 82)
• Camera –1 (p. 83)
54
I System Controller Behavior
during the Alarm Mode
When an alarm signal is input to cameras or system units,
this system controller is notified that an alarm has been
activated. Then, the ALARM indicator will blink. During the
alarm mode, “Alarm” sign will blink on the LCD, and the
camera number is displayed as “- - -“.
When an alarm is automatically canceled (=alarm auto
reset mode), “Alarm” sign changes from blinking to steady
light, and the LCD display returns to the normal status.
I Alarm Reset
You can cancel the alarm mode (“Alarm” sign is blinking.)
or alarm auto reset mode (The ALARM indicator is light-
ing.). The alarm inputs to all the system units will be reset
all together.
Press ALM RESET/ALM ALL RESET button.
The alarm mode or alarm auto reset mode of all the system
units will be cancelled, and the ALARM indicator will go out.
Notes:
• Alarm behaviors differ depending on connected system
units. Refer to the operating instructions of system units.
• You cannot cancel the alarm mode or alarm auto reset
mode of each system unit one by one.
I Alarm Suspension
You can temporarily stop alarm inputs to all the system
units in the following procedure.
1. Press the ALARM/ALM SUSPEND button while holding
down the SHIFT button.
The alarm inputs will be suspended and the ALM SUS-
PEND indicator will light up.
2. To cancel the alarm suspension mode, press
ALARM/ALM SUSPEND button again while holding
down the SHIFT button. The alarm suspension mode
will be canceled, and the ALM SUSPEND indicator will
go out.
Note: You cannot suspend each alarm input one by
one. The alarm inputs to all the system units will be
suspended all together.
I Alarm History Search
To play back a desired alarm image, the alarm history table
of selected system unit can be displayed. The following
procedure is available when the selected system unit can
display the alarm history table.
Note: WJ-HD300 Series does not support alarm history
search.
G How to Display Alarm History Tables
1. Press the ALM RECALL button.
“Alarm Recall” sign will appear on the LCD, and the
alarm history table will be displayed on an active moni-
tor.
2. Perform operations while watching the active monitor.
Note: The operation details differ depending on
recorders. Refer to pp. 55 to 56.
Controls commonly available
<Main unit>
Shuttle ring clockwise:
• Moves to the next page.
• Moves the cursor. (Available for WJ-HD500 or WJ-
HD200 Series)
Shuttle ring counterclockwise:
• Moves to the previous page.
• Moves the cursor. (Available for WJ-HD500 or WJ-
HD200 Series)
JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise:
• Moves the cursor.
• Changes the selected parameter. (Available for WJ-
HD500 or WJ-HD200 Series)
+ button: Increases a numeric value.
– button: Decreases a numeric value.
Numeric buttons: Enters numeric parameters.
CAM (SET) button: Determines the selected parame-
ter.
MON (ESC) or EXIT button: Closes the search list dis-
play.
ALARM CONTROL
Mon01 Cam--- HD316
Alarm
Alarm Recall
55
<Joystick unit>
3D joystick upward (L): Moves the cursor up.
3D joystick downward (M): Moves the cursor down.
3D joystick to the left (t): Moves the cursor to the left.
3D joystick to the right (s): Moves the cursor to the
right.
Zoom wheel controller to the right or left: Changes
the search list display. (For example, Record list ↔
Thumbnail Display ↔Record List …)
Top button: Determines the selected parameter.
Note: Depending on recorder types, you can press the
function buttons (F1 to F8) to activate the search func-
tion. The following are the details on LCD display pat-
terns and function buttons of WJ-HD500, WJ-HD300,
and WJ-HD100 Series recorders.
G Operation (WJ-HD500 Series)
Available buttons and functions
F1 button: Edit
You will press this button when editing the Search
Editing Area on the Record List.
F2 button: Group
The selected group is switched by rotation.
F4 button: Copy
The selected recording images will be copied to a
external recording device (DVD or CD-R).
Note: Refer to the operating instructions of recorder for
details on each function.
Example of F1 button use
1. Display the Alarm and Emergency Record List on the
active monitor. (Refer to Step 1 in p. 54 How to Display
Alarm History Tables.)
2. Press the F1 button.
Search Editing Area will appear on the Record List.
3. Move the cursor to a position to be edited by perform-
ing either of the following.
• Move the 3D joystick controller to the right or left.
• Rotate the shuttle ring clockwise or counterclock-
wise.
4. Enter the desired date and time by performing either of
the following.
• Rotate the JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise.
• Press the + or – button.
5. Repeat Step 3 and 4 to edit Search Editing Area.
6. After editing, press the CAM (SET) button.
The associated record will be displayed on the Record
List.
7. To close the Alarm and Emergency Record List , press
the ALM RECALL, EXIT, or MON (ESC) button.
Alarm Recall HD500
Edit Group Copy
F1 F2 F3 F4
Search Editing Area
MAY29.00 SEARCH: 0:01 G1
SEL:←→ CHG:+– EXE:SET ESC:FSTOP
DATE MAY29.00
GROUP NO TIME
ALL GROUP
G1 22:15:40 M/S ALM-TRM12
O/S ALM-VMD3
T/L ALM-TRM1
M/S ALM-PC4
T/L EMR
2343RECORD) (TOTAL
21:00:07
7:23:11
6:59:44
0:01:28
G3
ALL
G4
G3
010008
010007
010005
010004
010002
REC-MODE
MAY29.00 SEARCH: 9:31 ALL GROUP
SEL:←→ CHG:+– EXE:SET ESC:FSTOP
DATE MAY29.00
GROUP NO TIME
ALL GROUP
G1 22:15:40 M/S ALM-TRM12
O/S ALM-VMD3
T/L ALM-TRM1
M/S ALM-PC4
T/L EMR
2343RECORD) (TOTAL
21:00:07
7:23:11
6:59:44
0:01:28
G3
ALL
G4
G3
010008
010007
010005
010004
010002
REC-MODE
PLAY:B ESC:FSTOP SEL:JOG
SEARCH:DISPLAY
DATE MAY29.00
GROUP NO TIME
ALL GROUP
G1 22:15:40 M/S ALM-TRM12
O/S ALM-VMD3
T/L ALM-TRM1
M/S ALM-PC4
T/L EMR
2343RECORD) (TOTAL
21:00:07
7:23:11
6:59:44
0:01:28
G3
ALL
G4
G3
010008
010007
010005
010004
010002
REC-MODE
56
G Operation (WJ-HD200 Series)
Note: WJ-HD200 Ver. 1.24 later or WJ-HD220 supports
alarm history search. (Refer to the operating instruc-
tions of recorder.)
Available buttons and functions
F1 button: Edit
You will press this button when editing the Search
Editing Area on the ALARM RECALL window.
Note: Refer to the operating instructions of recorder for
details.
Example of F1 button use
1. Press the ALM RECALL button. The ALARM RECALL
window will be displayed on the active monitor.
2. Press the F1 button. Search Editing Area will appear on
the ALARM RECALL window.
3. Move the cursor to a position to be edited by perform-
ing either of the following.
• Move the 3D joystick controller to the right or left.
Alarm Recall HD200
Edit
F1 F2 F3 F4
ALARM RECALL YEAR03
NO. DATE TIME ALM
2000 JUN14 20:30:00 T1
1999 JUN14 15:30:12 T3
1998 JUN14 12:15:04 T4
1997 JUN14 12:15:02 V8
1996 JUN14 10:07:05 V2
1995 JUN14 10:07:04 T2
1994 JUN14 10:06:55 T6
1993 JUN14 09:58:32 V5
(TOTAL 2000EVENTS)
TO SEARCH PUSH T&D KEY
• Rotate the shuttle ring clockwise or counterclock-
wise.
4. Enter the desired date and time by performing either of
the following.
• Rotate the JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise.
• Press the + or – button.
5. Repeat Step 3 and 4 to edit Search Editing Area.
6. Press the CAM (SET) button. The specified playback
image will be displayed on the monitor.
7. To close the ALARM RECALL window, press the ALM
RECALL, EXIT, or MON (ESC) button.
G Operation (WJ-HD100 Series)
1. Press the ALM RECALL button. The ALARM RECALL
window will be displayed on the active monitor.
2. Move the cursor to a position to be edited by perform-
ing either of the following.
• Move the 3D joystick controller to the right or left.
• Rotate the JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise.
3. Enter the desired date and time by performing either of
the following.
• Rotate the JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise.
• Press the + or – button.
4. Press the CAM (SET) button. The specified playback
image will be displayed on the monitor.
5. To close the ALARM RECALL window, press the ALM
RECALL, EXIT, or MON (ESC) button.
Notes:
• You will use no function buttons for controlling the
recorder.
• Image to be played back differs depending on
recorders. (Refer to the operating instructions of
recorder.)
Alarm Recall HD100
ALARM RECALL 1 OF 10
NO DATE TIME ALM
99 JUN 9.00 00:00:00 * T
98 JUN 1.00 02:34:56 T
97 JUN 1.00 01:10:01 * V
96 MAY31.00 23:34:45 V
95 MAY30.00 02:00:20 * T
94 MAY14.00 05:30:31 * T
93 MAY 7.00 23:00:59 T
92 MAY 6.00 22:05:50 V
91 APR14.00 23:00:59 * T
90 APR14.00 16:06:34 * V
ALARM RECALL YEAR03
NO. DATE TIME ALM
2000 JUN14 20:30:00 T1
1999 JUN14 15:30:12 T3
1998 JUN14 12:15:04 T4
1997 JUN14 12:15:02 V8
1996 JUN14 10:07:05 V2
1995 JUN14 10:07:04 T2
1994 JUN14 10:06:55 T6
1993 JUN14 09:58:32 V5
(TOTAL 2000EVENTS)
SEARCH JUN14.03 12:00
Search Editing Area
57
MENU FUNCTION DESCRIPTIONS
You can assign frequently-used menu functions (system functions and camera functions, etc.) to the F1 to F8 button of system
controller. (=Button function) In addition, you can also assign the menu functions to the A, B and top buttons of 3D joystick
unit. (=Joystick button function) Only by pressing an associated button, you can recall the assigned button functions and joy-
stick functions.
Note: For details, refer to p. 63 To Assign Menu Functions to Function Buttons or p. 63 To Assign Menu Functions to Joystick
Function Buttons.
I Menu Flow
When you press the MENU button during normal operation, menu functions are displayed on the LCD. The menu functions are
classified according to the function types (camera functions, recorder functions, and system functions, etc.)
(Refer to p. 58 Menu Function Categories.)
Camera Functions
(CAM)
Recorder Functions
(HDD)
System Functions
(SYS)
Controller Functions
(CNT)
Joystick Functions
(J/S MENU)

























Mon04 Cam128 HD316
F1 F2 F3 F4
LCD MENU CAM 101
Camera Setup
LCD MENU HDD 201
HD300 DiskSelect
LCD MENU SYS 301
System Setup
LCD MENU CNT 401
Camera Cleaning
J/S MENU 501
Camera Function
J/S MENU 502
System Function
J/S MENU 503
Auto Pan
LCD MENU CNT 402
Time&Date Type
LCD MENU CNT 403
Auto Login
LCD MENU SYS 302
Switcher OSD
LCD MENU SYS 303
VLD History
LCD MENU HDD 202
HD300 A-B Repeat
LCD MENU HDD 203
HD300 Listed
LCD MENU CAM 102
Auto Mode
LCD MENU CAM 103
BW Mode
Normal status
MENU
EXIT
MON
(ESC)

• 60 seconds after the operation is discontinued
or
+
SHIFT
or
MENU
or
+
SHIFT
or
MENU
MENU
or
+
SHIFT
or
MENU
MENU
or
+
SHIFT
or
MENU
MENU
or
+
SHIFT
or
MENU
MENU
or
MENU
58
Auto Pan Setup
You will perform the auto pan setting of camera.
Note: Refer to the operating instructions of camera for
details on the auto pan function.
G Recorder Functions (HDD)
HD300 Disk Select (WJ-HD300 Series only)
You will select the built-in hard disk or an external recording
devices for playback by WJ-HD300 Series.
HD300 A-B Repeat (WJ-HD300 Series only)
• You will set the start and end points of A – B repeat
playback of WJ-HD300 Series.
• You will cancel A – B repeat playback of WJ-HD300
Series.
HD300 Listed (WJ-HD300 Series only)
You will cancel, recover, or temporarily cancel the search-
ing filter of WJ-HD300 Series.
HD500 V-Multi (WJ-HD500 Series only)
You will select a playback picture to display on the upper
left segment of the multiscreen monitor displaying live
images.
I Menu Function Categories
Menu functions are classified in the following categories.
Select a desired function for assignment or operation.
G Camera Functions (CAM)
Camera Setup
• This function displays or closes the camera setup menu
for system settings.
• You will change camera settings.
Auto Mode
You will select and activate one of the auto mode functions
of camera: sequence, sort, auto pan and patrol.
BW Mode
You will select and activate one of the color modes: MANU-
AL ON, MANUAL OFF, AUTO 1, and AUTO 2.
Note: Refer to the operating instructions of camera for
details on the BW mode.
Patrol Learn
You will perform the patrol learn setting of camera.
LCD MENU CAM 101
Camera Setup
LCD MENU CAM 102
Auto Mode
LCD MENU CAM 103
BW Mode
LCD MENU HDD 201
HD300 DiskSelect
LCD MENU HDD 202
HD300 A—B Repeat
LCD MENU HDD 203
HD300 Listed
LCD MENU HDD 204
HD500 V—Multi
LCD MENU CAM 105
Auto Pan Setup
LCD MENU CAM 104
Patrol Learn
59
G System Functions (SYS)
System Setup
You will open the setup menu of system unit and change
the settings.
Switcher OSD (WJ-SX150 Series only)
Displays or hides the OSD items displayed on monitors
connected to the matrix switcher.
VLD History (WJ-SX150 Series only)
Displays the VIDEO LOSS HISTORY table on monitors con-
nected to the matrix switcher.
Mux VCR/CAM (Available if Video Multiplexer
WJ-FS416 or Multiplexer Board WJ-SXB151 is
Used in the System)
You can activate either VCR playback or camera picture
display on an active monitor.
Mux Still (Available if Video Multiplexer WJ-
FS416 or Multiplexer Board WJ-SXB151 is
Used in the System)
You can activate either still or moving mode for display on
the multiscreen monitor.
G Controller
Camera Cleaning
You will select the first and last camera channel to perform
camera cleaning.
Time & Date Type
You will set the time and date display pattern of time-and-
date entry form.
Auto Login/Logout
You will set operators who can log into the system automati-
cally.
Operator Setup
• You will register a new operator.
• You will change parameters of registered operators.
Function Level
You will change the function levels of operators.
Camera Level
You will change the camera control levels of operators.
Cam Posi Map
You will register camera positions (the association of cam-
era numbers and preset position numbers).
LCD MENU SYS 301
System Setup
LCD MENU CNT 402
Time&Date Type
LCD MENU CNT 403
Auto Login/out
LCD MENU CNT 404
Operator Setup
LCD MENU CNT 405
Function Level
LCD MENU CNT 406
Camera Level
LCD MENU CNT 407
Cam Posi Map
LCD MENU SYS 302
Switcher OSD
LCD MENU SYS 303
VLD History
LCD MENU SYS 304
Mux VCR/CAM
LCD MENU SYS 305
Mux Still
LCD MENU CNT 401
Camera Cleaning
60
Cam-Unit Map
You will register cam-unit maps (the association of camera
numbers and unit numbers).
HDD-Unit Map
You will register HDD-unit maps (the association of
recorder numbers and unit numbers).
LCD Title
You will edit the function names of F1 to F8, which are dis-
played on the LCD.
G Joystick Button Functions (J/S MENU)
Camera Function
A camera function will be activated.
System Function
A system function will be activated.
Auto Pan
The auto pan function of selected camera will be activated.
Camera Sequence
The camera sequence function of selected camera will be
activated.
Camera Sort
The camera sort function of selected camera will be activat-
ed.
Patrol Play
The patrol function of selected camera will be activated.
Home Position
The selected camera will move to the home position.
Auto Focus
The “Auto Focus” function of selected camera will be acti-
vated.
Iris Reset
The lens iris of selected camera will be automatically reset
to the factory default.
LCD MENU CNT 409
HDD-Unit Map
J/S MENU 506
Patrol Play
J/S MENU 505
Camera Sort
J/S MENU 504
Camera Sequence
J/S MENU 509
Iris Reset
J/S MENU 508
Auto Focus
J/S MENU 507
Home Position
J/S MENU 501
Camera Function
J/S MENU 502
System Function
J/S MENU 503
Auto Pan
LCD MENU CNT 408
Cam-Unit Map
LCD MENU CNT 410
LCD Title
61
Camera +1
The image of camera with the higher channel number will
be displayed.
Camera –1
The image of camera with the lower channel number will be
displayed.
HD300 A-B Repeat (WJ-HD300 Series Only)
• You will set the start and end points of A – B repeat
playback of WJ-HD300 Series.
• You will cancel A – B repeat playback of WJ-HD300
Series.
HD500 Copy (WJ-HD500 Series Only)
Recorded images will be copied from the built-in hard disk
of recorder to external recording devices.
HD200 Alarm Search (WJ-HD200 Series Only)
The alarm search function of recorder will be activated.
Multiscreen Display
The screen of monitor connected to the selected system
unit will be divided in multiscreen segments.
Note: Available multiscreen segment patterns differ
depending on system units. Refer to the operating
instructions of system units.
I To Recall Menu Functions
You can recall menu functions as follows.
1. Select a system unit for which you wish to recall a func-
tion. (Refer to p. 41 System Unit Selection, p. 41
Recorder Selection, p. 42 Monitor Selection, or p. 42
Camera Selection.)
Note: You can skip Step 2 and 3 if you know what func-
tion to recall. In this case, enter a function number,
and press the MENU button. Then, go to Step 4.
2. Press the MENU button.
“Camera Setup” main menu will appear on the LCD.
3. Select a desired function.
Select a category (¸) by rotating the shuttle ring. Then,
select a function number (¸) by rotating the JogDial.
Note: Refer to pp. 58 to 61 for selectable functions.
J/S MENU 510
Camera +1
LCD MENU CAM 101
Camera Setup
LCD MENU SYS 301
System Setup
Mon01 Cam016 HD316
F1 F2 F3 F4
J/S MENU 511
Camera -1
J/S MENU 512
HD300 A—B Repeat
J/S MENU 513
HD500 Copy
J/S MENU 514
HD200 Alm Search
J/S MENU 515
Multi 4-Seg
J/S MENU 516
Multi 7-Seg
J/S MENU 517
Multi 9-Seg
J/S MENU 520
Multi 16-Seg
J/S MENU 519
Multi 13-Seg
J/S MENU 518
Multi 10-Seg
62
4. Press the ENTER or CAM (SET) button.
The sub menu of selected function will appear on the
LCD.
5. Perform the operations to activate the selected function.
The operating procedure differs depending on each
function. Refer to pp. 65 to p. 84.
6. To exit the sub menu, press the EXIT or MON (ESC)
button. The LCD display will return to the main menu.
7. To exit the main menu, press the EXIT or MON (ESC)
button again. The LCD display will return to the default
status.
I Factory Default Setting of
Button Functions and Joystick
Button Functions
The following functions have been assigned to the function
(F1 to F8) buttons and joystick function (A, B, and top) but-
tons.
Note: To change the default assignments, refer to p. 63 To
Assign Menu Functions to Function Buttons or p. 63. To
Assign Menu Functions to Joystick Function Buttons.
F1: Camera Setup
F2: Auto Mode
F3: BW Mode
F4: Patrol Learn
F5 (SHIFT + F1): System Setup
F6 (SHIFT + F2): HD300 A – B Repeat
F7 (SHIFT + F3): HD300 Listed
F8 (SHIFT + F4): HD300 Disk Select
A: Iris Reset
B: Auto Focus
Top: Auto Focus
Camera Setup F1
On Off Rst A.Rst
Iris Reset A
Auto Focus B
Auto Focus J/S
Auto Mode F2
Seq Sort Pan Patrol
BW Mode F3
On Off Auto1 Auto2
HD300 DiskSelect F8
Nr-A Cp–A Cpy1 Cpy2
System Setup 301
On Off
Mon01 Cam016 HD316
F1 F2 F3 F4
LCD MENU SYS 301
System Setup
Patrol Learn F4
Start Stop
System Setup F5
On Off
HD300 A—B Repeat F6
Start End Cancel
HD300 Listed F7
On Off
63
I To Assign Menu Functions to
Function Buttons
All menu functions are assignable to the function (F1 to F8)
buttons. (Refer to pp. 65 to 84 for each function.)
1. Press the MENU button.
“Camera Setup” main menu will appear on the LCD.
2. Select a desired function.
Select a desired category by rotating the shuttle ring.
3. Select a function name by rotating the JogDial.
• You can skip Step 2 if you know what function to
recall. In this case, enter a function number, and
press the ENTER button.
4. Press the function button you wish to assign the func-
tion for two seconds. The function will be assigned to
the button, and the message will appear for a few sec-
onds.
Notes:
• To assign menu functions to F5 to F8 buttons, press
one of the F1 to F4 buttons for two seconds while
holding down the SHIFT button.
• The setting procedure differs depending on each
function. Refer to pp. 65 to 84.
5. To exit the menu, press the EXIT or MON (ESC) button.
The LCD display will return to the default status.
I To Assign Menu Functions to
Joystick Function Buttons
Joystick button functions are assignable to the A, B, or top
button on the 3D joystick unit. (Refer to p. 80 to 84 for each
function.)
1. Perform Step 1 to 3 in To Assign Menu Functions to
Function Buttons.
Note: Skip the next step when assigning neither
“Camera Function” nor “System Function”.
2. Enter a desired camera or system function number with
the numeric buttons. The entered number will appear
on the LCD for a few seconds.
Notes:
• The illustration is an example in which Camera
Function Number 1 is pressed.
• Refer to the operating instruction of camera for
details on camera function.
• Refer to the operating instruction of system unit for
details on system function.
3. Press the A, B or top button for two seconds.
• The menu function will be assigned to the button
you pressed.
• “Assign” message will appear for a few seconds, as
shown in the illustration.
Note: The illustration is an example in which “Camera
Function Code = 1” has been assigned to the A
button.
4. To exit the menu, press the EXIT or MON (ESC) button.
The LCD will return to the normal display.
Mux Still 305
Assign F2
Camera Function 501
Assign A Code= 1
LCD MENU CAM 101
Camera Setup
LCD MENU SYS 301
System Setup
LCD MENU SYS 305
Mux Still
J/S MENU ____1
Camera Function
64
I To Recall Button Functions and
Joystick Button Functions
You can recall the assigned button functions and joystick
button functions as follows.
1. Press one of the function buttons (F1 to F4/F5 to F8) or
one of the joystick function buttons (A, B, and top but-
tons). The sub menu of recalled function will appear on
the LCD.
Note: To recall a function assigned to the F5 to F8 but-
ton, press the function button while holding down
the SHIFT button.
2. Perform the operations to activate the function.
The operating procedure differs depending on each
function. Refer to pp. 65 to 84.
Note: To cancel the function, press the EXIT or MON
(ESC) button. The LCD display will return to the nor-
mal status.
I To Check Button Functions and
Joystick Button Functions
You can check the functions assigned to the function (F1 to
F8) buttons and joystick function (A, B, and top) buttons.
1. Press the MENU button while holding down the SHIFT
button. The F1 button function will appear on the LCD.
Note: This illustration is an example in which “Camera
Setup” is assigned to the F1 button.
2. To check other (joystick) button functions, rotate the
JogDial. The button functions and joystick button func-
tion will appear on the LCD in the following order.
3. To finish checking the function, press the EXIT or MON
(ESC) button.
The LCD will return to the normal status.
Function Check F1
Camera Setup 101




Function Check F1
Camera Setup 101
Function Check F8
System Setup 301
Function Check A
Cam Func "4096" 501
Function Check B
Sys Func "999" 502
Function Check J/S
Auto Focus 506
Function Check F1
Camera Setup 101
Camera Setup F1
On Off Rst A.Rst
Mon02 Cam128 HD316
F1 F2 F3 F4
65
MENU FUNCTION DETAILS
I Camera Functions
G Camera Setup
You can display the setup menu of selected camera on the
active monitor.
Note: The details on the setup menu differ depending on
camera models. Refer to the operating instructions of
camera.
1 .Display “Camera Setup” sub menu. (Refer to Step 1 to
4 of p. 61 To Recall Menu Functions.)
2. Press the F1 button.
The setup menu of selected camera will appear on the
active monitor, and “s” mark will light up beside “On”.
3. Perform the camera setting while watching the setup
menu on the monitor.
Available controls and functions
<Main unit>
JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise: Changes the
selected parameter.
+ button: Increases a numeric value.
– button: Decreases a numeric value.
CAM (SET) button: Determines the selected parameter
and moves to the sub menu.
MON (ESC) or EXIT button: Returns to the upper
menu.
F3 button:
• Displays the special menu.
• To restore the default camera position, move the
cursor to REFRESH on the camera setup menu by
moving the 3D joystick. Then, press this button.
F4 button: To reset all the camera settings to the facto-
ry default, move the cursor to CAMERA RESET on
the camera setup menu by moving the 3D joystick.
Then, press this button.
<Joystick unit>
3D joystick upward (L): Moves the cursor up.
3D joystick downward (M): Moves the cursor down.
3D joystick to the left (t):
• Decreases a numeric value.
• Moves the cursor to the left.
3D joystick to the right (s):
• Increases a numeric value.
• Moves the cursor to the right.
3D joystick + SHIFT button: Panning/tilting control
Top button: Determines the selected parameter and
moves to the sub menu.
B button: Auto focus
4. Press the F2 button.
The setup menu of selected camera will be closed, and
“s” mark will go out.
G Auto Mode
You can activate an auto mode (auto sequence, auto sort,
auto pan, and camera patrol) for the selected camera.
Note: Refer to the operating instructions of camera for
details on auto mode.
1. Display “Auto Mode” sub menu. (Refer to Step 1 to 4 of
p. 61 To Recall Menu Functions.)
2. Select a desired function by pressing one of the F1 to
F4 buttons. Auto mode will be activated.
Available buttons and functions
F1: Seq
Activates the sequence mode.
F2: Sort
Activates the sort mode.
F3: Pan
Activates the auto pan mode.
F4: Patrol
Activates the patrol mode.
Note: Auto mode will be canceled when you pan or tilt the
selected camera by moving the 3D joystick.
Camera Setup 101
On Off Rst A.Rst
F1 F2 F3 F4
Auto Mode 102
Seq Sort Pan Patrol
F1 F2 F3 F4
Camera Setup 101
On Off Rst A.Rst
F1 F2 F3 F4
66
G BW Mode
You can change the color mode of camera images from
color to black and white. This function is activated to
improve the camera sensitivity when monitoring a dark
place.
Note: Refer to the operating instructions of camera for
details on auto mode.
1. Display “BW Mode” sub menu. (Refer to Step 1 to 4 of
p. 61 To Recall Menu Functions.)
2. Press one of the F1 to F4 buttons.
BW mode will be activated.
Available buttons and functions
F1: On
Changes the camera image from color to black and
white.
F2: Off
Changes the camera image from black and white to
color .
F3: Auto1
Activates Auto 1 mode. (The camera selects black
and white mode if the picture is dark, or color mode
if the picture is bright enough.)
F4: Auto2
Activates Auto 2 mode. (The camera detects the
light source type to prevent malfunction. This set-
ting is applicable when using a near-infrared light
source in a dark place.)
Notes:
• The camera detects light source based on the informa-
tion the CCD image pickup element receives. If an
object is continuously moving or has the same color as
the background, the object may not be properly recog-
nized. When activating Auto 2 mode, make sure the
wavelength of light source is 800 nm or more.
• If the available parameters for selected camera are ON,
OFF, and AUTO, you can activate AUTO by pressing
the F3 button.
To recover the color mode
Press the F2 button. The color mode is recovered for the
camera image.
G Patrol Learn
You will perform the patrol learn setup.
Note: Refer to the operating instructions of camera for
details on patrol learn.
1. Display “Patrol Learn” sub menu. (Refer to Step 1 to 4
of p. 61 To Recall Menu Functions.)
2. Press the F1 button.
The patrol learn setup will start.
3. Perform desired camera operations by moving the 3D
joystick or zoom wheel controller, etc.
The following controls are available for patrol learn.
• Panning/Tilting (3D joystick)
• Iris control (IRIS OPEN/CLOSE buttons)
• Focus control (FOCUS FAR/NEAR buttons)
• Zoom control (Zoom wheel controller)
• Preset position
Note: The available total time of patrol learn differs
depending on cameras. When the time is over, the
patrol learn setup will automatically stop.
4. To quit the patrol learn setup, press the F2 button.
To activate preset positions during the patrol
learn
To move the camera to a preset position during the patrol
learn, you will perform the following operations after Step 2
of Patrol Learn.
1. Enter a preset position number.
The entered number will appear on the LCD.
Note: To cancel the entry, press the CLEAR button.
2. Press the PRESET/PGM PRESET button.
“Pre=nn” (nn is a number.) will blink on the LCD, and
the camera will move to the preset position.
BW Mode 103
On Off Auto1 Auto2
F1 F2 F3 F4
Patrol Learn 104
Start Stop
F1 F2 F3 F4
Patrol Learn ____3
Start Stop
F1 F2 F3 F4
67
Note: After the camera has moved to the preset posi-
tion, “Pre-nn” will go out.
G Auto Pan Setup and Activation
You will set up and activate the auto pan function. The cam-
era can pan between the start and end points you will set.
To set the start and end point of auto pan
1. Display “Auto Pan” sub menu. (Refer to Step 1 to 4 of p.
61 To Recall Menu Functions.)
2. By moving the 3D joystick, move the camera to a point
you wish to start auto pan.
3. Press the F3 button.
The start point of auto pan will be set.
4. By moving the 3D joystick, move the camera to a point
you wish to end auto pan.
5. Press the F4 button.
The end point of auto pan will be set.
To activate auto pan
Press the F1 button.
The auto pan will be activated, and the camera will pan
between the set.
Notes:
• If you press the F2 button, and then activate the auto
pan, the auto pan range will be reversed.
• Auto pan will be canceled when you pan or tilt the
selected camera by moving the 3D joystick.
I Recorder Functions
G Disk Selection
(WJ-HD300 Series Only)
You will specify a disk for search playback.
1. Display “HD300 DiskSelect” sub menu. (Refer to Step 1
to 4 of p. 61 To Recall Menu Functions.)
2. Press one of the F1 to F4 buttons.
The specified disk will be selected.
Available buttons and functions
F1: Nr-A
Specifies the normal or event recording area for
playback.
F2: Cp-A
Specifies the copy area for playback.
F3: Cpy1
Specifies the external recording device connected
to COPY 1 for the playback media. (This button is
available for WJ-HD316A and WJ-HD309.)
F4: Cpy2
Specifies the external recording device connected
to COPY 2 for the playback media. (This button is
available for WJ-HD316A and WJ-HD309.)
3. When you specify a disk, the search list display will
appear on the active monitor, and “Search Mode” menu
will appear on the LCD. Then, perform the search play-
back operation. (Refer to p. 45 Search Playback.)
G A-B Repeat Playback Setting
(WJ-HD300 Series Only)
You can playback the recorded images repeatedly by
specifying the start point (A) and end point (B).
1. Display “HD300 A- B Repeat” sub menu. (Refer to Step
1 to 4 of p. 61 To Recall Menu Functions.)
2. During playback, press the F1 button at the point you
wish to start playback. The playback start point (A) will
be set.
Note: To cancel the start point, press the F4 button.
HD300 A—B Repeat 202
Start End Cancel
F1 F2 F3 F4
Auto Pan Setup 105
Play Rvrs Start End
F1 F2 F3 F4
Search Mode HD300
Thumb Text Copy
Patrol Learn Pre003
Start Stop
F1 F2 F3 F4
HD300 DiskSelect 201
Nr-A Cp-A Cpy1 Cpy2
F1 F2 F3 F4
68
3. Press the F2 button at the point you wish to end play-
back. The playback end point (B) will be set, and the
repeat playback will be performed between (A) and (B).
Note: To quit the playback, press the STOP button.
G Filtering ON/OFF
(WJ-HD300 Series Only)
During the filtering playback, the searching filter will be
temporarily canceled or recovered.
1. Display “HD300 Listed” sub menu. (Refer to Step 1 to 4
of p. 61 To Recall Menu Functions.)
Note: Depending on the recorder status, "s" mark may
light up beside "Off.
2. Press the F2 button.
The searching filter will be canceled, and “s” mark will
light up beside “Off”.
Note: To recover the searching filter, press the F1 button.
The searching filter will be recovered, and “s” mark will
light up beside “On”.
G Displaying Camera and Playback Image
(WJ-HD500 Series Only)
While camera images are being displayed in the multi-
screen display, playback picture can be displayed on one
of the multiscreen segments. (When the spot mode is acti-
vated for the camera image on the monitor, playback pic-
ture cannot be displayed.)
Note: Refer to the operating instructions of recorder for
details on this function.
1. Display “HD500 V-Multi” sub menu. (Refer to Step 1 to
4 of p. 61 To Recall Menu Functions.)
2. Enter the channel number of camera whose playback
picture you wish to display.
The entered number will appear on the LCD.
Note: To cancel the numeric entry, press the CLEAR
button.
3. Press the F1 button.
• Playback picture will be displayed on the multi-
screen monitor.
• The specified camera channel will blink on the LCD
for a few seconds, and the LCD display will return
to Step 1.
Note: To quit the playback on the multiscreen monitor,
press the STOP button.
I System Functions
G System Setup
You can display the setup menu of selected system unit on
the active monitor.
Note: The details on the setup menu differ depending on
system units. Refer to the operating instructions of sys-
tem unit.
1. Display “System Setup” sub menu. (Refer to Step 1 to 4
of p. 61 To Recall Menu Functions.)
2. Press the F1 button.
The setup menu of selected system unit will appear on
the active monitor, and “s” mark will light up beside
“On”.
HD300 Listed 203
On Off
F1 F2 F3 F4
HD300 Listed 203
On Off
F1 F2 F3 F4
HD500 V-Multi 204
Video CH=__5
System Setup 301
On Off
F1 F2 F3 F4
System Setup 301
On Off
F1 F2 F3 F4
HD500 V-Multi 204
"Input Video CH"
HD500 V-Multi ____5
"Enter F1 Button"
69
3. Perform the camera setting while watching the setup
menu on the monitor.
Available controls and functions
<Main unit>
Shuttle ring clockwise: Moves to the next page.
Shuttle ring counterclockwise: Moves to the previous
page.
JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise: Changes the
selected parameter.
+ button: Increases a numeric value.
– button: Decreases a numeric value.
Numeric buttons: Enters a numeric parameter.
CLEAR button (WJ-HD300 Series Only): Clears an
entry such as a password.
Button 0 (WJ-HD300 Series Only): If you enter only "0"
for a parameter, the parameter will be cleared.
CAM (SET) button: Determines the selected parameter
and moves to the sub menu.
MON (ESC) or EXIT button: Returns to the upper
menu.
<Joystick unit>
3D joystick upward (L): Moves the cursor up.
3D joystick downward (M): Moves the cursor down.
3D joystick leftward (t): Moves the cursor to the left.
3D joystick rightward (s): Moves the cursor to the
right.
Zoom wheel controller to the right: Moves to the next
page.
Zoom wheel controller to the left: Moves to the previ-
ous page.
Top button: Determines the selected parameter and
moves to the sub menu.
4. Press the F2 button.
The setup menu of selected system unit will be closed,
and “s” mark will light up beside “Off”.
G On-screen Display (OSD) Control
1. Display "Switcher OSD" sub menu. (Refer to Step 1 to 4
of p. 61 To Recall Menu Functions.)
2. Press one of the F1 to F4 buttons.
One of the following OSD items will appear/disappear
on/from the active monitor.
Available buttons and functions
F1: Clock
Displays/hides the time and date.
F2: Camera title
Displays/hides the camera title.
F3: Event
Displays/hides the event.
F4: Monitor status
Displays/hides the monitor status.
G Video Loss History Table
1. Display "VLD History" sub menu. (Refer to Step 1 to 4 of
p. 61 To Recall Menu Functions.)
2. Press the F1 button.
The VIDEO LOSS HISTORY table will appear on the
active monitor.
3. To close the VIDEO LOSS HISTORY table, press the F2
button.
G VCR/Camera Selection
(WJ-FS416, etc: Available Only for
Switchers Installing Multiplexer
Board)
If a Multiplexer board is installed inside the switcher, you
can activate either VCR playback or camera picture display
on an active monitor.
1. Display “Mux VCR/CAM” sub menu. (Refer to Step 1 to
4 of p. 61 To Recall Menu Functions.)
Note: “s” mark will light up beside the activated set-
ting.
2. Press the F1 or F2 button.
The monitor display will be changed between playback
pictures and live images, and “s” mark will light up
beside the activated setting.
Mux VCR/CAM 304
VCR CAM
F1 F2 F3 F4
Mux VCR/CAM 304
VCR CAM
F1 F2 F3 F4
Switcher OSD 302
Clock Cam Event Mon
F1 F2 F3 F4
VLD History 303
On Off
F1 F2 F3 F4
70
3. Press the F1 button.
• The still mode will be activated for the selected
camera channel.
• The specified camera channel will blink on the LCD
for a few seconds, and the LCD display will return
to Step 1.
Note: To return the multiscreen monitor display from the
still mode to moving mode, perform 1 to 3 again.
I Controller Functions
G Camera Cleaning
1. Display “Camera Cleaning” sub menu. (Refer to Step 1
to 4 of p. 61 To Recall Menu Functions.)
2. Select the camera to clean first by performing one of
the following.
• Rotate the JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise.
• Press the + or – button.
• Enter the camera number with the numeric buttons.
3. Rotate the shuttle ring clockwise or move the 3D joy-
stick to the right. The cursor will jump to the next item.
4. Select the camera to clean last by performing one of
the following.
• Rotate the JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise.
• Press the + or – button.
• Enter the camera number with the numeric buttons.
Available buttons and functions
F1: VCR
Activates VCR playback.
F2: CAM
Activates camera picture display.
Note: If the Multiplexer board is receiving no video
input signal, “s” mark will light up beside VCR.
G Still Mode
(WJ-FS416, etc: Available Only for
Switchers Installing Multiplexer
Board)
If a Multiplexer board is installed inside the switcher, you
can change the multiscreen monitor display from the mov-
ing mode to the still mode.
1. Display “Mux Still” sub menu. (Refer to Step 1 to 4 of p.
61 To Recall Menu Functions.)
2. Select the camera channel you wish to change to the
still mode by performing either of the following.
• Press the + or – button.
• Enter the camera number with the numeric buttons.
The entered number will appear on the LCD.
Notes:
• To cancel the numeric entry, press the CLEAR but-
ton.
• To activate the still mode for all camera channels or
spot monitor display, skip this step or enter “0”.
Camera Cleaning 401
Start Cancel 003-999
F1 F2 F3 F4
Mux Still 305
Still CH=__9
Camera Cleaning 401
Start Cancel 001-999
F1 F2 F3 F4
Mux Still 305
Still CH=All
Mux Still 305
"Input Still CH"
Mux Still ____9
"Enter F1 Button"
Mux Still ____0
"Enter F1 Button"
71
• Rotate the JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise.
• Press the + or – button.
The following patterns are available.
Display pattern Display Example
DD/MM/YYYY HH:MM 24 21/08/2001 22:55 24 *
2
MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM 24 08/21/2001 22:55 24
DD/Mmm/YYYY HH:MM 24 21/Aug/2001 22:55 24
YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM 24 2001/08/21 22:55 24
Mmm/DD/YYYY HH:MM 24 Aug/21/2001 22:55 24
DD/MM/YYYY HH:MM 12 21/08/2001 10:55 12
MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM 12 08/21/2001 10:55 12
DD/Mmm/YYYY HH:MM 12 21/Aug/2001 10:55 12
YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM 12 2001/08/21 10:55 12
Mmm/DD/YYYY HH:MM 12 Aug/21/2001 10:55 12 *
1
*
1
Factory default for U.S. models
*
2
Factory default for Europe models
Note: In this diagram, “12” means 12 hour display and
“24” means 24 hour display.
3. Press the ENTER or CAM (SET) button.
“Set OK?” will appear on the LCD.
Note: To cancel the setting, press the EXIT or MON
(ESC) button.
4. Press the ENTER or CAM (SET) button again.
The display pattern will be set.
“Memory” will appear on the LCD for a few seconds,
and the LCD display will return to Step 1.
G Auto Login/Logout Setup
If auto login or auto logout is activated, operators can log
into or log out of the system automatically.
Note: You cannot set both Auto Login and Auto Logout to
ON for the same system controller.
1. Display “Auto Login” sub menu. (Refer to Step 1 to 4 of
p. 61 To Recall Menu Functions.)
Note: To return the cursor to the previous item, rotate
the shuttle ring counterclockwise or move the 3D
joystick to the left.
5. Press the F1 button.
Camera cleaning will be cleared from the first to the last
camera you have set.
During the cleaning, the current channel number will be
displayed on the LCD.
When the all cameras have started to be cleaned,
“End” will appear on the LCD.
Notes:
• To quit the cleaning, press the F2 button.
• It may take a few minutes since “End” appears on
the LCD until camera cleaning ends.
• If you have selected a lower channel for the last
camera than the first camera, “Invalid” will appear
on the LCD.
In this case, select a higher camera channel for the
last camera.
G Time & Date Search Display Pattern
You can set up the clock display pattern of the LCD for the
time & date search. You can select a desired one from 10
patterns.
1. Display “Time & Date Type” sub menu. (Refer to Step 1
to 4 of p. 61 To Recall Menu Functions.)
2. Select a desired display pattern by performing either of
the following.
Auto Login/out 403
Cont No.1 Off
Time&Date Type 402
Type0 Memory
Time&Date Type 402
Type0 Set OK?
Invalid
Camera Cleaning 401
Start Cancel 003-064
F1 F2 F3 F4
Camera Cleaning 401
Start Cancel Cam028
Time&Date Type 402
Mmm/DD/YYYY HH:MM 12
Camera Cleaning 401
Start Cancel End
Time&Date Type 402
DD/MM/YYYY HH:MM 24
72
To deactivate auto login or auto logout
1. Select a system controller to deactivate auto login or
auto logout by performing either of the following.
• Rotate the JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise.
• Press the + or – button.
2. Press the CLEAR button.
“Clear OK?” will appear on the LCD.
Note: To cancel deactivating auto login, press the EXIT
or MON (ESC) button.
3. Press the ENTER or CAM (SET) button.
Auto login or auto logout will be deactivated.
“Erased” will appear on the LCD for a few seconds, and
the LCD display will return to Step 1.
G Operator Registration or Change
You can register new operators or change the parameter
settings. Up to 16 operators are registrable in the system.
Notes:
• Refer to p. 38 Operation Start (Login) for the factory
default.
• To return to the previous step, press the EXIT or MON
(ESC) button.
1. Display “Operator Setup” sub menu. (Refer to Step 1 to
4 of p. 61 To Recall Menu Functions.)
2. Select an operator to register or change the settings by
performing either of the following.
• Rotate the JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise.
• Press the + or – button.
2. Select a system controller to activate auto login or auto
logout by performing either of the following.
• Rotate the JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise.
• Press the + or – button.
Note: The factory default is “Cont No. 1”.
3. Rotate the shuttle ring clockwise or move the 3D joy-
stick to the right.
4. To activate auto login, select an operator
(Operator 1 to 16) by performing the following.
• Rotate the JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise.
• Press the + or – button.
To activate auto logout, select the duration until auto
logout (Logout 5 to 120)* by performing the following.
* The numbers mean minutes.
• Rotate the JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise.
• Press the + or – button.
Notes:
• Parameters can be changed as follows.
Operator 1 → Operator 2 …→ Operator 16 → Logout
5 → Logout 10 …→ Logout 120 → Operator 1 …
• To return the cursor to Cont No. n, rotate the shuttle ring
counterclockwise or move the 3D joystick to the left.
• Auto Logout setting will be activated after you log
into the system again.
5. Press the ENTER or CAM (SET) button.
“Set OK?” will appear on the LCD.
Note: To cancel the setting, press the EXIT or MON
(ESC) button.
6. Press the ENTER or CAM (SET) button again.
Auto login will be set.
"Memory” will appear on the LCD for a few seconds,
and the LCD display will return to Step 1.
Operator Setup 404
Operator01
Auto Login/out 403
Cont No.6 Clear OK?
Auto Login/out 403
Cont No.6 Erased
Auto Login/out 403
Cont No.6 Set OK?
Auto Login/out 403
Cont No.6 Operator06
Auto Login/out 403
Cont No.6 Memory
Auto Login/out 403
Cont No.6 Logout 30
Auto Login/out 403
Cont No.6 Off
Auto Login/out 403
Cont No.6 Operator06
Auto Login/out 403
Cont No.6 Logout 30
73
Note: When registering a new operator, select an oper-
ator number beside which “No Assign” is displayed.
3. Press the ENTER or CAM (SET) button.
“User ID” setting menu will appear on the LCD.
4. Enter a user ID by pressing the numeric buttons.
“1” to “99999” are available for the user ID number.
Note: If you have entered a wrong user ID, press the
CLEAR button.
5. Press the ENTER or CAM (SET) button.
The password entry form will appear on the LCD.
6. Enter a password by pressing the numeric buttons.
“1” to “99999” are available for the password.
Note: If you have entered a wrong password, press the
CLEAR button.
7. Press the ENTER or CAM (SET) button.
“Function Level” setting menu will appear on the LCD.
8. Set the function level by performing either of the follow-
ing.
• Rotate the JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise.
• Press the + or – button.
Notes:
• Refer to p. 74 Function Level Setting for details on
function level.
• You cannot change the function level of Operator 1.
If you try to change, “Level 1 Fixed” will appear on
the LCD.
9. Press the ENTER or CAM (SET) button.
“Camera Level” setting menu will appear on the LCD.
10. Set the camera level by performing either of the follow-
ing.
• Rotate the JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise.
• Press the + or – button.
Notes:
• Refer to p. 75 Camera Level Setting for details on
camera level.
• You cannot change the camera level of Operator 1.
If you try to change, “Level 1 Fixed” will appear on
the LCD.
11. Press the ENTER or CAM (SET) button.
“Set OK?” will appear on the LCD.
12. Press the ENTER or CAM (SET) button again.
The new operator and the settings will be registered.
“Memory” will appear on the LCD for a few seconds,
and the LCD display will return to Step 1.
Operator07 404
Camera Level = 2
Operator01 404
Level1 Fixed
Operator07 404
Set OK?
Operator07 404
Memory
Operator07 404
User ID= 1
Operator07 404
User ID= 777
Operator07 404
Function Level = 1
Operator07 404
Function Level = 2
Operator01 404
Level1 Fixed
Operator07 404
Camera Level = 1
Operator Setup 404
Operator02
Operator Setup 404
Operator07 No Assign
Operator07 404
Password= 12345
Operator07 404
Password= 333
74
To delete an operator
Note: You cannot delete Operator 1. If you try to delete,
“Level1 Fixed” will appear on the LCD.
1. Select an operator to delete by performing either of the
following.
• Rotate the JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise.
• Press the + or – button.
Note: If you select an operator not registered, “No
Assign” will appear beside the operator number.
2. Press the CLEAR button.
“Clear OK?” will appear on the LCD.
Note: To cancel deleting the operator, press the EXIT
or MON (ESC) button.
3. Press the ENTER or CAM (SET) button.
• The operator will be deleted.
• “Erased” will appear on the LCD for a few seconds,
and the LCD display will return to Step 1.
Note: After the operator has been deleted, “No Assign”
will appear beside the operator number.
G Function Level Setting
You can change the function levels for each button (except
for numeric buttons) of main unit and 3D joystick unit. The
function levels range between Table No. 1 (highest level)
and 3 (Lowest level).
Note: Table No. 1 is fixed to E (Enabled) for all the func-
tions.
1. Display “Function Level” sub menu. (Refer to Step 1 to
4 of p. 61 To Recall Menu Functions.)
2. Select a desired table (= function level) by performing
either of the following.
• Rotate the JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise.
• Press the + or – button.
• Enter the table number with the numeric buttons.
3. Press the CAM (SET) button.
The setting menu for the selected table will appear on
the LCD.
4. Select a desired function by performing one of the fol-
lowing.
• Rotate the JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise.
• Press the + or – button.
• Enter the function number with the numeric buttons.
The function setting will appear on the LCD.
The following diagram describes the function settings
changeable and their factory defaults.
Function Table2 405
08 IRIS OPEN/CLOSE=E
Operator Setup 404
Operator15 No Assign
Operator01 404
Level1 Fixed
Operator Setup 404
Operator07
Operator Setup 404
Operator07 Clear OK?
Operator Setup 404
Operator07 Erased
Function Table2 405
01 MENU =E
Operator Setup 404
Operator07 No Assign
Function Level 405
Table No. =1
Function Level 405
Table No. =2
75
Function Table 2 Table 3
01 MENU D D
02 F1 – F4 E E
03 F5 – F8 E E
04 A B E E
05 TOP SW E E
06 JOYSTICK E E
07 FOCUS NEAR/FAR E E
08 IRIS OPEN/CLOSE E D
09 CAM/SET E E
10 MON/ESC E E
11 UNIT E E
12 RECORDER E E
13 CAM POSI E E
14 PRESET E E
15 PGM PRESET D D
16 HISTORY E E
17 –/+ E E
18 JOG DIAL E E
19 SHUTTLE RING E E
20 SHUTTLE HOLD E E
21 PLAY/PAUSE E E
22 STOP E E
23 REC E D
24 ALM SUSPEND E D
25 ALM RESET E E
26 OSD E E
27 ALM RECALL E E
28 SEQ PAUSE E E
29 SEQUENCE E E
30 MULTI SCREEN E E
31 EL-ZOOM E E
32 AUX1 ON/OFF E E
33 AUX2 ON/OFF E E
34 DEF ON/OFF E E
35 WIPER ON E E
36 SYS FUNC D D
37 CAM FUNC D D
38 GO TO LAST E E
39 MARK E E
40 SEARCH E E
41 T&D SEARCH E E
E=Enabled, D=Disabled
5. Rotate the shuttle ring clockwise or move the 3D joy-
stick to the right. The cursor will jump to the next item.
Note: To return to Step 4, rotate the shuttle ring coun-
terclockwise or move the 3D joystick to the left.
6. Select E or D by performing either of the following.
• Rotate the JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise.
• Press the + or – button.
Note: To change the settings of other functions, repeat
Step 4 to 6.
7. Press the ENTER or CAM (SET) button.
“Set OK?” will appear on the LCD.
Note: To cancel the setting, press the EXIT or MON
(ESC) button. The LCD display will return to Step 6.
8. Press the ENTER or CAM (SET) button again.
The function levels will be set for the selected table.
“Memory” will appear on the LCD for a few seconds,
and the LCD display will return to Step 1.
G Camera Level Setting
You can change the camera levels for each operator. The
camera levels range between Table No. 1 (highest level)
and 3 (Lowest level).
Notes:
• Table No. 1 is fixed to E (Enabled) for all cameras.
• As the factory default, Table No. 2 and 3 are set to E for
all cameras.
1. Display “Camera Level” sub menu. (Refer to Step 1 to 4
of p. 61 To Recall Menu Functions.)
2. Select a desired table (= camera level) by performing
one of the following.
• Rotate the JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise.
• Press the + or – button.
• Enter the function number with the numeric buttons.
3. Press the CAM (SET) button.
The setting menu for the selected table will appear on
the LCD.
4. Select a desired camera channel by performing one of
the following.
• Rotate the JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise.
• Press the + or – button.
• Enter the camera number with the numeric buttons.
Camera Table3 406
Cam001 =E
Function Table2 405
08 IRIS OPEN/CLOSE=E
Camera Level 406
Table No. =3
Camera Level 406
Table No. =1
Function Table2 405
08 IRIS OPEN/CLOSE=D
Function Table2 405
Set OK?
Function Table2 405
Memory
76
Note: You can select a camera channel from 1 to 999.
5. Rotate the shuttle ring clockwise or move the 3D joy-
stick to the right. The cursor will jump to the next item.
Note: To return to Step 4, rotate the shuttle ring coun-
terclockwise or move the 3D joystick to the left.
6. Select E (= Enabled) or D (= Disabled) by performing
either of the following.
• Rotate the JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise.
• Press the + or – button.
E (= Enabled): The operator can display the cam-
era image on the monitor and control panning/tilt-
ing. (VIEW & CONTROL)
D (= Disabled): The operator can display the cam-
era image on the monitor, but cannot control the
panning/tilting. (VIEW ONLY)
Note: To change the settings of other cameras, repeat
Step 4 to 6.
7. Press the ENTER or CAM (SET) button.
“Set OK?” will appear on the LCD.
Note: To cancel the setting, press the EXIT or MON
(ESC) button. The LCD display will return to Step 6.
8. Press the ENTER or CAM (SET) button again.
The camera levels will be set for the selected table.
“Memory” will appear on the LCD for a few seconds,
and the LCD display will return to Step 1.
G Camera Position Registration or
Clearing
This system controller can memorize camera position num-
bers, which are the combination of camera numbers and
preset position numbers. By entering a camera position
number, you can select a desired camera and preset posi-
tion at a time. You can register up to 1 000 camera position
numbers.
1. Display “Cam Posi Map” sub menu. (Refer to Step 1 to
4 of p. 61 To Recall Menu Functions.)
2. Select a camera position number to register by per-
forming one of the following.
• Rotate the JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise.
• Press the + or – button.
• Enter the camera position number with the numeric
buttons.
Notes:
• To register a new position number, press the
numeric buttons.
• You can select a camera position number from 0 to
999.
3. Rotate the shuttle ring clockwise or move the 3D joy-
stick to the right. The cursor will jump to the next item.
Note: To return to Step 2, rotate the shuttle ring coun-
terclockwise or move the 3D joystick to the left.
4. Select a desired camera channel by performing one of
the following.
• Rotate the JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise.
• Press the + or – button.
• Enter the camera number with the numeric buttons.
Note: You can select a camera channel from 1 to 999.
5. Rotate the shuttle ring clockwise or move the 3D joy-
stick to the right. The cursor will jump to the next item.
Note: To return to Step 4, rotate the shuttle ring coun-
terclockwise or move the 3D joystick to the left.
Camera Table3 406
Memory
Cam Posi Map 407
Cam-P016 C005 Pre016
Cam Posi Map 407
Cam-P001 C001 Pre001
Cam Posi Map 407
Cam-P016 C001 Pre016
Camera Table3 406
Cam064 =E
Camera Table3 406
Cam064 =D
Camera Table3 406
Set OK?
Camera Table3 406
Cam064 =E
77
6. Select a desired preset position number by performing
either of the following.
• Rotate the JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise.
• Press the + or – button.
Note: You can select a preset position number from 1
to 256.
7. Press the ENTER or CAM (SET) button.
“Set OK?” will appear on the LCD.
Note: To cancel the setting, press the EXIT or MON
(ESC) button. The LCD display will return to Step 6.
8. Press the ENTER or CAM (SET) button again.
The specified camera channel and preset position num-
ber will be set for the selected camera position.
“Memory” will appear on the LCD for a few seconds,
and the LCD display will return to Step 1.
To delete a camera position
1. Select a camera position to delete by performing either
of the following.
• Rotate the JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise.
• Press the + or – button.
2. Press the CLEAR button.
“Clear OK?” will appear on the LCD.
Note: To cancel deleting the camera position, press the
EXIT or MON (ESC) button.
3. Press the ENTER or CAM (SET) button.
The camera position will be deleted.
“Erased” will appear on the LCD for a few seconds, and
the LCD display will return to Step 1.
G Associating Camera Numbers with
Unit Numbers
You can register camera-unit maps (the association of cam-
era numbers and unit numbers). Up to 999 camera unit
maps can be registered. You can select a camera by enter-
ing the camera channel alone, even if the camera is con-
nected to system unit not currently selected.
Note: If “Enable” is selected in Step 2, you can select only
camera numbers associated with unit numbers.
1. Display “Cam-Unit Map” sub menu. (Refer to Step 1 to
4 of p. 61 To Recall Menu Functions.)
Note: To disable camera-unit maps, display the “s”
mark beside “Disable” by rotating the shuttle ring
counterclockwise or moving the 3D joystick to the
left.
2. Press the ENTER or CAM (SET) button.
The camera-unit setting will appear on the LCD.
3. Select a desired camera channel by performing one of
the following.
• Rotate the JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise.
• Press the + or – button.
• Enter the camera number with the numeric buttons.
Notes:
• To register a new position number, press the
numeric buttons.
• You can select a camera channel from 1 to 999.
• The following are the factory default settings.
Cam Posi Map 407
Cam-P016 Erased
Cam-Unit Map 408
Disable Enable
Cam-Unit Map 408
Disable Enable
Cam-Unit Map 408
Cam001 Unit01
Cam-Unit Map 408
Cam016 Unit01
Cam Posi Map 407
Cam-P016 C005 Pre032
Cam Posi Map 407
Cam-P016 Set OK?
Cam Posi Map 407
Cam-P016 C005 Pre032
Cam Posi Map 407
Cam-P016 Clear OK?
Cam Posi Map 407
Cam-P016 Memory
78
Default settings of camera-unit maps
Cam Unit
001 to 016 01
017 to 032 02
033 to 048 03
049 to 064 04
065 to 256 – –
4. Rotate the shuttle ring clockwise or move the 3D joy-
stick to the right. The cursor will jump to the next item.
Note: To return to Step 3, rotate the shuttle ring coun-
terclockwise or move the 3D joystick to the left.
5. Select a desired unit number by performing either of the
following.
• Rotate the JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise.
• Press the + or – button.
Note: You can select a unit number from 1 to 99.
6. Press the ENTER or CAM (SET) button.
“Set OK?” will appear on the LCD.
Note: To cancel the setting, press the EXIT or MON
(ESC) button. The LCD display will return to Step 6.
7. Press the ENTER or CAM (SET) button again.
The specified camera channel and unit number will be
set for the selected camera-unit map.
“Memory” will appear on the LCD for a few seconds,
and the LCD display will return to Step 1.
To delete a camera-unit map
1. Perform Step 1 to 3 in p. 77 Associating Camera
Numbers with Unit Numbers.
2. Press the CLEAR button.
“Clear OK?” will appear on the LCD.
Note: To cancel deleting the setting, press the EXIT or
MON (ESC) button.
3. Press the ENTER or CAM (SET) button.
The camera-unit map will be deleted.
“Erased” will appear on the LCD for a few seconds, and
the LCD display will return to Step 3.
Note: After all the camera-unit maps have been delet-
ed, “Cam000” will appear for the camera channel
area.
G Associating Recorder Numbers with
Unit Numbers
You can register HDD-unit maps (the association settings of
recorder numbers and unit numbers). Up to 16 HDD-unit
maps can be registered. You can select a recorder by
entering a desired recorder number.
Note: As the factory default, recorder numbers have been
associated with unit numbers having the same num-
bers. (“HDD01” with “Unit01”, “HDD02” with “Unit02”...)
1. Display “HDD-Unit Map” sub menu. (Refer to Step 1 to
4 of p. 61 To Recall Menu Functions.)
2. Select a desired recorder number by performing either
of the following.
• Rotate the JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise.
• Press the + or – button.
Note: You can select a recorder number from 1 to 16.
3 .Rotate the shuttle ring clockwise or move the 3D joy-
stick to the right. The cursor will jump to the next item.
Note: To return to Step 2, rotate the shuttle ring coun-
terclockwise or move the 3D joystick to the left.
4. Select a desired unit number by performing either of the
following.
• Rotate the JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise.
• Press the + or – button.
HDD-Unit Map 409
HDD01 Unit01
HDD-Unit Map 409
HDD06 Unit06
HDD-Unit Map 409
HDD06 Unit05
Cam-Unit Map 408
Cam016 Unit02
Cam-Unit Map 408
Cam016 Set OK?
Cam-Unit Map 408
Cam016 Memory
Cam-Unit Map 408
Cam016 Clear OK?
Cam-Unit Map 408
Cam016 Erased
79
Note: You can select a unit number from 1 to 99.
5. Press the ENTER or CAM (SET) button.
“Set OK?” will appear on the LCD.
Note: To cancel the setting, press the EXIT or MON
(ESC) button. The LCD display will return to Step 4.
6. Press the ENTER or CAM (SET) button again.
The specified recorder number and unit number will be
set for the selected HDD-unit map.
“Memory” will appear on the LCD for a few seconds,
and the LCD display will return to Step 1.
To delete a HDD-unit map
1. Perform Step 1 and 2 in p. 78 Associating Recorder
Numbers with Unit Numbers.
2. Press the CLEAR button.
“Clear OK?” will appear on the LCD.
Note: To cancel deleting the setting, press the EXIT or
MON (ESC) button.
3. Press the ENTER or CAM (SET) button.
The HDD-unit map will be deleted.
“Erased” will appear on the LCD for a few seconds, and
the LCD display will return to Step 1.
Note: After all the HDD-unit maps have been deleted,
“HDD00” will appear for the camera channel area.
“HDD-Unit Map Check” menu will appear on the
LCD.
G LCD Title Editing
You can edit button function titles displayed on the LCD.
If you set LCD titles related to the registered button func-
tions, controllability will be improved.
1 .Display “LCD Title” sub menu. (Refer to Step 1 to 4 of
p. 61 To Recall Menu Functions.)
2. Select a desired title group (F1-F4 or F5-F8) by rotating
the shuttle ring or moving the 3D joystick.
3. Press the ENTER or CAM (SET) button.
The title editing form will appear on the LCD.
4. Select desired characters by performing either of the
following.
• Rotate the JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise.
• Press the + or – button.
Notes:
• To move the cursor, rotate the shuttle ring (clock-
wise or counterclockwise) or move the 3D joystick
(to the right or left)
• To delete a character, press the CLEAR button.
• To display the next or previous character group,
rotate the JogDial while holding down the SHIFT
button.(For example, when the cursor is pointed on
“C”, “a” can be displayed by rotating the JogDial
clockwise while holding down the SHIFT button.)
• The following diagram describes the available char-
acters.
Character group Characters
Space “”(Space) I
Capital letters ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
Small letters abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz
Numerics 0123456789
Symbols !”#$%&’()∗+,–./:;<=>?[¥]^_{|}→←@
5. Press the ENTER or CAM (SET) button.
“Set OK?” will appear on the LCD.
Note: To cancel the setting, press the EXIT or MON
(ESC) button. The LCD display will return to Step 4.
6. Press the ENTER or CAM (SET) button again.
The LCD title you have edited will be registered.
“Memory” will appear on the LCD for a few seconds,
and the LCD display will return to Step 1.
LCD Title F1-F4 410
F1 F2 F3 F4
When "F1 — F4" is selected
LCD Title F1-F4 410
Set OK?
LCD Title F5-F8 410
F5 F6 F7 F8
When "F5 — F8" is selected
HDD-Unit Map 409
HDD06 Memory
HDD-Unit Map 409
HDD06 Clear OK?
HDD-Unit Map 409
HDD06 Erased
LCD Title 410
F1-F4 F5-F8
HDD-Unit Map 409
HDD06 Set OK?
80
I Joystick Button Functions
If you register a joystick button function to a function button
or joystick function button, you can activate the associated
function only with pressing the button.
G Camera Function
You can recall camera functions by entering function num-
bers from this system controller.
Note: Refer to the operating instruction of camera for
details on camera function.
1. Display “Camera Function” sub menu. (Refer to Step 1
to 4 of p. 61 To Recall Menu Functions.)
2 Enter a camera function number by pressing the
numeric buttons. The entered number will appear on
the LCD.
Notes:
• To cancel the numeric entry, press the CLEAR but-
ton.
• If you press the CAM (SET) button, the image of
selected camera will be displayed on the active
monitor, and the LCD will return to the default sta-
tus.
3. Press the F1 button.
• The associated camera function will be activated.
• The specified camera function will blink on the LCD
for a few seconds, and the LCD display will return
to Step 1.
Note: When the camera function has been activated by
the A button, the LCD display will become as fol-
lows.
G System Function
You can recall system functions by entering function num-
bers from this system controller.
Note: Refer to the operating instruction of system unit for
details on system function.
1. Display “Camera Function” sub menu. (Refer to Step 1
to 4 of p. 61 To Recall Menu Functions.)
2. Enter a system function number by pressing the numer-
ic buttons. The entered number will appear on the LCD.
Notes:
• To cancel the numeric entry, press the CLEAR but-
ton.
• If you press the CAM (SET) button, the image of
selected camera will be displayed on the active
monitor, and the LCD will return to the default sta-
tus.
3. Press the F1 button.
• The associated system function will be activated.
• The specified system function will blink on the LCD
for a few seconds, and the LCD display will return
to Step 1.
Note: When the system function has been activated by
the A button, the LCD display will become as fol-
lows.
System Function 502
"Input Code Number"
System Function____5
"Enter F1 Button"
System Function 502
Code=___5
System Function A
Code=0018
Camera Function 501
"Input Code Number"
Camera Function____7
"Enter F1 Button"
Camera Function A
Code=0007
Camera Function 501
Code=___7
LCD Title F1-F4 410
Memory
81
G Auto Pan
You can activate the auto pan mode for the selected cam-
era.
Note: Refer to the operating instruction of camera for
details of this function.
1. Display “Auto Pan” sub menu. (Refer to Step 1 to 4 of p.
61 To Recall Menu Functions.)
2. Press the F1 button.
The auto pan mode will be activated.
Note: When the auto pan function has been activated
with the A button, the LCD display will become as
follows.
G Camera Sequence
You can activate the camera sequence mode for the select-
ed camera.
Note: Refer to the operating instruction of camera for
details of this function.
1. Display “Camera Sequence” sub menu. (Refer to Step
1 to 4 of p. 61 To Recall Menu Functions.)
2. Press the F1 button.
The camera sequence mode will be activated.
Note: When the camera sequence mode has been acti-
vated with the A button, the LCD display will
become as follows.
G Camera Sort
You can activate the auto sort mode for the selected cam-
era.
Note: Refer to the operating instruction of camera for
details of this function.
1. Display “Camera Sort” sub menu. (Refer to Step 1 to 4
of p. 61 To Recall Menu Functions.)
2. Press the F1 button.
The camera sort mode will be activated.
Note: When the camera sort mode has been activated
with the A button, the LCD display will become as
follows.
G Patrol Play
You can activate the patrol play function for the selected
camera.
Note: Refer to the operating instruction of camera for
details of this function.
1. Display “Patrol Play” sub menu. (Refer to Step 1 to 4 of
p. 61 To Recall Menu Functions.)
2. Press the F1 button.
The patrol play mode will be activated.
Note: When the patrol play mode has been activated
with the A button, the LCD display will become as
follows.
Patrol Play A
Camera Sequence A
F1 F2 F3 F4
Camera Sort 505
“Enter F1 Button”
Camera Sort A
F1 F2 F3 F4
Patrol Play 506
“Enter F1 Button”
Auto Pan A
F1 F2 F3 F4
Camera Sequence 504
“Enter F1 Button”
F1 F2 F3 F4
Auto Pan 503
“Enter F1 Button”
82
G Iris Reset
You can activate the iris reset function for the selected
camera.
Note: Refer to the operating instruction of camera for
details of this function.
1. Display “Iris Reset” sub menu. (Refer to Step 1 to 4 of
p. 61 To Recall Menu Functions.)
2. Press the F1 button.
The iris reset function will be activated.
Note: When the iris reset function has been activated
with the A button, the LCD display will become as
follows.
G Camera +1
You can change the camera image on the monitor to the
higher channel.
1. Display “Camera +1” sub menu. (Refer to Step 1 to 4 of
p. 61 To Recall Menu Functions.)
2. Press the F1 button.
The image of higher camera channel will be displayed
on the active monitor.
Note: When the Camera +1 function has been activat-
ed with the A button, the LCD display will become
as follows
G Home Position
You can move the selected camera to the home position.
Note: Refer to the operating instruction of camera for
details of this function.
1 Display “Home Position” sub menu. (Refer to Step 1 to
4 of p. 61 To Recall Menu Functions.)
2. Press the F1 button.
The camera will move to the home position.
Note: When the home position has been activated with
the A button, the LCD display will become as fol-
lows.
G Auto Focus
You can activate the auto focus function for the selected
camera.
Note: Refer to the operating instruction of camera for
details of this function.
1. Display “Auto Focus” sub menu. (Refer to Step 1 to 4 of
p. 61 To Recall Menu Functions.)
2. Press the F1 button.
The auto focus function will be activated.
Note: When the auto focus function has been activated
with the A button, the LCD display will become as
follows.
Camera +1 A
F1 F2 F3 F4
Iris Reset 509
“Enter F1 Button”
Iris Reset A
Camera +1 510
“Enter F1 Button”
F1 F2 F3 F4
F1 F2 F3 F4
Home Position 507
“Enter F1 Button”
Auto Focus A
Home Position A
F1 F2 F3 F4
Auto Focus 508
“Enter F1 Button”
83
G Camera –1
You can change the camera image on the monitor to the
lower channel.
1. Display “Camera –1” sub menu. (Refer to Step 1 to 4 of
p. 61 To Recall Menu Functions.)
2. Press the F1 button.
The image of lower camera channel will be displayed
on the active monitor.
Note: When the Camera –1 function has been activated
with the A button, the LCD display will become as
follows.
G A - B Repeat Playback (WJ-HD300
Series Only)
The description is the same as that of button function. Refer
to p. 67 A – B Repeat Playback Setting.
Note: Refer to the operating instruction of recorder for
details of this function.
1. Display “HD300 A – B Repeat” sub menu. (Refer to
Step 1 to 4 of p. 61 To Recall Menu Functions.)
2. Press the F1 button at the point you wish to start play-
back.
The playback start point (A) will be set, and “Start” will
appear on the LCD for a few seconds.
3. Press the F1 button again at the point you wish to end
playback. The playback end point (B) will be set, and
“End” will appear on the LCD for a few seconds. Then, the
repeat playback will be performed between (A) and (B).
Notes:
• To quit the repeat playback, press the F1 button
again. “Cancel” will appear on the LCD for a few
seconds.
• When the A – B repeat playback function has been
activated with the function button, the LCD display
will become as follows.
G Recorded-image Copy (WJ-HD500
Series Only)
You can copy recorded images from the built-in hard disk
to an external recording device.
Note: Refer to the operating instruction of recorder for
details of this function.
1. Display “HD500 Copy” sub menu. (Refer to Step 1 to 4
of p. 61 To Recall Menu Functions.)
2. Press the F1 button.
The record copy function will be activated.
Note: When the record copy function has been activat-
ed with the A button, the LCD display will become
as follows.
HD500 Copy 513
“Enter F1 Button”
F1 F2 F3 F4
HD300 A—B Repeat A
Start
HD300 A—B Repeat A
End
HD300 A—B Repeat A
Cancel
HD300 A—B Repeat 512
Start
F1 F2 F3 F4
HD300 A—B Repeat 512
End
F1 F2 F3 F4
HD300 A—B Repeat 512
Cancel
Camera -1 A
HD300 A—B Repeat 512
“Enter F1 Button”
F1 F2 F3 F4
Camera -1 511
“Enter F1 Button”
F1 F2 F3 F4
84
G Alarm Search (WJ-HD200 Series /
WJ-HD100 Series)
You can move the playback start point to the next alarm
record of recorded image data.
Note: Refer to the operating instruction of recorder for
details of this function.
1. Display “HD200 Alm Search” sub menu. (Refer to Step
1 to 4 of p. 61 To Recall Menu Functions.)
2. Press the F1 button.
The alarm search function will be activated.
Note: When the alarm search function has been activat-
ed with the A button, the LCD display will become
as follows.
G Multiscreen Display
You can change the multiscreen segment patterns of moni-
tor connected to the selected system unit.
Note: Available multiscreen segment patterns differ
depending on system units. Refer to the operating
instructions of system units.
1. Display a desired sub menu among the following.
(Refer to Step 1 to 4 of p. 61 To Recall Menu
Functions.)
4-segment multiscreen display
7-segment multiscreen display
9-segment multiscreen display
10-segment multiscreen display
13-segment multiscreen display
16-segment multiscreen display
2. Press the F1 button.
The multiscreen display function will be activated.
Note: When the multiscreen display function has been
activated with the A button, the LCD display will
become as follows.
Multi 10-Seg 518
“Enter F1 Button”
F1 F2 F3 F4
Multi 13-Seg 519
“Enter F1 Button”
F1 F2 F3 F4
Multi 16-Seg 520
“Enter F1 Button”
F1 F2 F3 F4
HD200 Alm Search A
Multi 4-Seg 515
“Enter F1 Button”
F1 F2 F3 F4 Multi 4-Seg A
Multi 7-Seg 516
“Enter F1 Button”
F1 F2 F3 F4
Multi 9-Seg 517
“Enter F1 Button”
F1 F2 F3 F4
HD500 Copy A
HD200 Alm Search 514
“Enter F1 Button”
F1 F2 F3 F4
85
TROUBLESHOOTING
Check the following before requesting repair.
If a trouble cannot be corrected even after checking and trying remedy, contact your dealer.
Refer to p. 36.
Problem Check item and Remedy Reference
The power of system controller is not
turned on.
The AC adapter may be disconnected
from either the system controller or the
AC outlet. Check the connection.
The DC plug may not be firmly plugged
into the DC 9 V Input jack of system
controller. Check the connection.
Refer to p. 36.
The brightness of LCD is not enough. /
Characters do not appear on the LCD.
The display setting value of LCD may
be improper. Check the setting.
Refer to p. 38.
Login standby display does not appear
on the LCD.
Users cannot control cameras with the
3D joystick.
Users cannot log into the system. Cables may be disconnected from
either the DATA ports of system con-
troller or other system units. Check the
connections.
The line termination settings of MODE
switches may be wrong. Check the set-
tings and turn on the power again.
You may have entered a wrong user ID.
Reenter the user ID correctly.
You may have entered a wrong pass-
word. If the password is wrong, the
LCD will return to the login standby dis-
play. Reenter the password correctly.
Refer to p. 20.
Refer to p. 24.
Refer to pp. 38 and 39.
Refer to pp. 38 and 39.
The cable may be disconnected from
either the main unit or 3D joystick unit.
Check the connection.
The combination codes of main unit
and 3D joystick unit may not be identi-
cal. Check their combination codes.
Refer to p. 21.
Refer to p. 21.
The settings of MODE switches at the
rear panel may be wrong. Check the
settings and turn on the power again.
Refer to p. 24.
The setting of CONTROLLER NO.
switch may be wrong. Check the setting
and turn on the power again.
Refer to p. 25.
You may have turned on the power
while some buttons of system controller
was held down. Check no buttons are
being held down, and turn on the power
again.
Refer to p. 36.
Users who have logged into the system
may not be authorized to control cameras
with the 3D joystick. Check the user level
settings of these users.
Refer to pp. 72 to 76.
Panning, tilting, or zooming is activated even
when you are not controlling the 3D joystick.
The speed of panning and tilting is not equal
depending on directions.
86
"Controller No.1 No Exist Error" is dis-
played on the LCD.
There may be no system controller set to
CONTROLLER NO. 1. A system controller
must be set to CONTROLLER NO.1.
Check the CONTROLLER NO. switch at
the rear panel of each system controller.
Refer to p. 25.
The power cord insulation is damaged. The power cord or the plug is damaged.
If you continue to use it, a fire or an elec-
tric shock may occur. Unplug the AC
adapter immediately, and refer servicing
to qualified service personnel.
Refer to p. 21.
The buzzer may be set to OFF. Check
the setting.
Buzzer sound is not heard.
You cannot activate any functions even
when pressing the A, B, or top button of
the 3D joystick unit.
Refer to p. 38.
The cable may be disconnected from
either the system controller or 3D joy-
stick. Check the connection.
Function assignment settings of the A, B
or top button may be wrong. Check the
settings.
Refer to pp. 63 and 64.
Users who have logged into the system
may not be authorized to control cam-
eras with these buttons. Check the user
level settings of these users.
Refer to pp. 72 to 76.
Function assignment settings of the F1 to
F8 buttons may be wrong. Check the
settings.
You cannot activate any functions even
when pressing the function buttons (F1
to F4/F5 to F8).
Refer to pp. 63 and 64.
Users who have logged into the system
may not be authorized to control cam-
eras with these buttons. Check the user
level settings of these users.
Refer to pp. 72 to 76.
When pressing one of the function but-
tons (F1 to F4/F5 to F8), there is a differ-
ence between the function displayed on
the LCD and that recalled actually.
Function assignment settings of the F1 to
F8 buttons may be wrong. Check the
settings.
The LCD title may have been edited
wrongly. Check the setting.
Refer to pp. 63 and 64.
Refer to p. 79.
There is an invalid button even when it is
pressed.
Can the selected monitor, camera, or
system unit activate the function
assigned to the button? Depending on
system devices, available functions will
differ. Refer to the operating instructions
of selected system unit.


Users who have logged into the system
may not be authorized to control cam-
eras with the button. Check the user
level settings of these users.
There may be a user controlling system
units from another system controller.
Check that no users are controlling other
system controllers.
Operation is suddenly discontinued
while controlling system units.
“ALM SUSPEND” indicator light up or
goes out even when no system unit is
controlled.
The power cord and the power plug of
the AC adapter are hot during use.
The power cord gets warm or hot if bent
or pulled during use.



Problem Check item and Remedy Reference
Refer to pp. 72 to 76.
87
● DATA Port
RS-485 Port
System controller’s rear panel
● System Controller
Power Source
WV-CU950: 9 V DC, 600 mA (using the supplied AC adapter)
WV-CU650: 9 V DC, 300 mA (using the supplied AC adapter)
Supplied AC Adapter: 120 V AC, 60 Hz, 200 mA
Ethernet Port (WV-CU950 only): 10/100 Base-T, RJ-45 x 1
Data Output/Input Port: 6-conductor modular jack (RS-485, Full duplex) x2
Serial Port: 9-pin D-sub connector
Controller Number: 1 to 8 (rotary switch)
Ambient Operating Temperature: –10 °C to + 50 °C {14 °F to 122 °F}*
Unit Number Selection: 1 to 99**
Monitor Number Selection: 1 to 99**
Camera Number Selection: 1 to 256**
Dimensions
Main Unit: 290 mm (W) x 111 mm (H) x 221 mm (D)
{11-7/16 in. (W) x 4-3/8 in. (H) X 8-11/16 in. (D)}
3D Joystick Unit: 134 mm (W) x 146 mm (H) x 218 mm (D)
{5-1/4 in. (W) x 5-3/4 in. (H) x 8-9/16 in. (D)}
Weight
Main Unit: 1.3 kg {2.9 lbs.} (without the AC adapter)
3D Joystick Unit: 0.8 kg {1.8 lbs.}
* The performance is not guaranteed until the inside temperature rises up to 0 °C {32 °F}.
** These values are applicable in the PS·Data mode only. Refer to the operating instructions of system devices for the termi-
nal mode and Ethernet mode.
SPECIFICATIONS
STANDARD ACCESSORIES
Operating Instructions (This Document) ................................ 1 pc.
The following parts are used during installation procedures.
AC Adapter (UL Listed, Parts No: N0JBEF000001) ............... 1 pc.
6-conductor Modular Cable (3 m) .......................................... 1 pc.
TB TA RB RA
IN OUT
GND GND
TA
TB
RA
RB
Internal block
Panasonic Canada Inc.
5770 Ambler Drive,Mississauga,
Ontario, L4W 2T3 Canada (905)624-5010
http://www.panasonic.ca
Panasonic Sales Company
Division of Panasonic Puerto Rico Inc.
San Gabriel Industrial Park 65th Infantry Ave. KM. 9.5 Carolina
P.R. 00985(809)750-4300
Panasonic System Solutions Company,
Unit Company of Panasonic Corporation of North America
Security Systems
www.panasonic.com/security
For customer support, call 1.877.733.3689
Executive Office: Three Panasonic Way 2H-2, Secaucus, New Jersey 07094
Zone Office
Eastern: Three Panasonic Way, Secaucus, New Jersey 07094
Central: 1707 N. Randal Road, Elgin, IL 60123
Southern: 1225 Northbrook Parkway, Suwanee, GA 30024
Western: 6550 Katella Ave., Cypress, CA 90630
© 2005 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. All Rights Reserved. N0504-4045 3TR002330EAA Printed in Japan

ENGLISH VERSION

Caution: Refer to the name plate on the rear of this product to verify identifications and power ratings.

CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN

For U.S.A

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. FCC Caution: To assure continued compliance, (example use only shielded interface cables when connecting to computer or peripheral devices). Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.

SA 1965

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated "dangerous voltage" within the product's enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. SA 1966

The serial number of this product may be found on the bottom of the unit. You should note the serial number of this unit in the space provided and retain this book as a permanent record of your purchase to aid identification in the event of theft. Model No. Serial No.

WARNING: To prevent fire or electric shock hazard, do not expose this appliance to rain or moisture. The apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing and that no objects filled with liquids, such as vases, shall be placed on the apparatus.

2

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
1) Read these instructions. 2) Keep these instructions. 3) Heed all warnings. 4) Follow all instructions. 5) Do not use this apparatus near water. 6) Clean only with dry cloth. 7) Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 8) Do not use near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat. 9) Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A grounding-type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet. 10) Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles and the points where they exit from the apparatus. 11) Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer. 12) Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-overs.

S3125A

13) Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time. 14) Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped.

3

LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
This product is a system controller to operate PS·Data system units and connected cameras. (A surveillance control system cannot be composed of this product alone.) IN NO EVENT SHALL MATSUSHITA ELECTRIC INDUSTRIAL CO., LTD. BE LIABLE TO ANY PARTY OR ANY PERSON, EXCEPT FOR CERTAIN WARRANTY PROGRAM OFFERED BY THE LOCAL DEALER OF PANASONIC, FOR THE CASES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO BELOW: (1) ANY DAMAGE AND LOSS, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR EXEMPLARY, ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO THE PRODUCT; (2) PERSONAL INJURY OR ANY DAMAGE CAUSED BY INAPPROPRIATE USE OR NEGLIGENT OPERATION OF THE USER; (3) UNAUTHORIZED DISASSEMBLY, REPAIR OR MODIFICATION OF THE PRODUCT BY THE USER; (4) INCONVENIENCE OR ANY LOSS ARISING WHEN IMAGES ARE NOT DISPLAYED, DUE TO ANY REASON OR CAUSE INCLUDING ANY FAILURE OR PROBLEM OF THE PRODUCT; (5) ANY PROBLEM, CONSEQUENTIAL INCONVENIENCE, OR LOSS OR DAMAGE, ARISING OUT OF THE SYSTEM COMBINED BY THE DEVICES OF THIRD PARTY.

4

.............................7 DOCUMENT CONVENTION ........................................................................................14 I LCD Display Descriptions ...................................................................................................50 I Zooming Control ..............19 INSTALLATIONS AND CONNECTIONS .37 I LCD/Buzzer Adjustment ........53 I Auxiliary Control ...42 I Camera Selection ...........................................20 I Basic System Connections ....................................................................................................51 I Home Position Control ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................23 SETUP PROCEDURES (HARDWARE) ..............................64 MENU FUNCTION DETAILS .......10 I 3D Joystick Unit ..................................................................10 I Main Unit ..........................................................40 UNIT SELECTION ................26 I All Reset ................................................64 I To Check Button Functions and Joystick Button Functions .............................................43 I On-screen Display (OSD) Control .............50 I Preset Position Control ............................63 I To Assign Menu Functions to Joystick Function Buttons .....70 I Joystick Button Functions ..........36 I Basic Operation Flow ..................................................................................................................................................................53 ALARM CONTROL ............................45 I Playback ....80 TROUBLESHOOTING .....................54 I Alarm Suspension ........................... Switch Setting ....................3 LIMITATION OF LIABILITY ....................................................62 I To Assign Menu Functions to Function Buttons .85 SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................41 I Recorder Selection ......................................................................49 I Other Available Functions ......38 I Operation Start (Login) .............................63 I To Recall Button Functions and Joystick Button Functions .........................58 I To Recall Menu Functions ............8 DETAILED PRODUCT DESCRIPTION ............................................................................................................................................................38 I If You Have Forgotten the Login Password .............................................54 MENU FUNCTION DESCRIPTIONS ........53 I Other Functions .......................49 CAMERA CONTROL .............24 I Setup Procedures ...............................................................8 NOTIFICATION ABOUT OPERATION MODES......................................45 I Search Playback ..............................................24 I CONTROLLER NO..............................................15 INSTALLATIONS AND SYSTEM CONNECTIONS.............52 I Wiper Control ...........................................40 I Operation End (Logout) ..............................61 I Factory Default Setting of Button Functions and Joystick Button Functions ..................................51 I Camera Position Control ..........................................33 OPERATING PROCEDURES (PS·DATA).............................87 5 .........................................40 I Operation Start (Auto Login) ............42 SYSTEM UNIT CONTROL ...........................27 I To Change the Administrator Password .....................................41 I System Unit Selection ..................................................44 RECORDER CONTROL ....31 I PS·Data Database Copy ...65 I Recorder Functions ..CONTENTS IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS ....................20 I Connection with the 3D Joystick Unit ....6 FEATURES ................................32 I PS·Data Operator Password Check ...........................................45 I Manual Recording .....................................................................................................45 I Time & Date Search Playback ......25 SETUP PROCEDURES (FIRMWARE) ...........6 PRECAUTIONS ..51 I Camera Function Control ....52 I Defroster Control .....................................................................57 I Menu Function Categories ......................................87 STANDARD ACCESSORIES...9 MAJOR OPERATING CONTROLS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS .....................................................................................50 I Lens Focus Control .....................................................................................................52 I Camera Selection Recall ......................................................................67 I System Functions ...........................54 I System Controller Behavior during the Alarm Mode ........................36 I Power-off .........................................21 WV-CU950/650 SETUP PROCEDURES ................................21 I Adjustment of 3D Joystick ..............................................54 I Alarm History Search .....35 BEFORE OPERATION ...26 I Setting Modes ............................................................................................43 I Electronic Zooming .......................57 I Menu Flow .4 PREFACE ...........................................................................................................................................................43 I Tour Sequence/Group Sequence .26 I PS·Data Communication Setting .41 I Monitor Selection .....50 I Camera Panning/Tilting Control ...........................................................................................24 I MODE Switch Setting ..........................................................43 I Multiscreen Display .......................................................................................68 I Controller Functions ...............................................................................................................................................26 I Administrator Password Entry .........................................................................................................................................36 I Power-on ...................8 NOTIFICATION ABOUT SYSTEM UNITS ..................44 I System Function Control .................................54 I Alarm Reset .............................50 I Lens Iris Control ...........65 I Camera Functions ........................................................................................................

multiscreen segment switching. matrix switchers. • Improved camera controllability This product has employed a 3D joystick which is separated from the main unit. password is assignable to prevent inappropriate operations. up to 4 system controllers can be connected for multiple operation. • System Controller WV-CU950 can control Central Processing Unit WJ-MPU955 and System 850 Matrix Switcher via an Ethernet (10/100 Base-T) network. You can control the camera zooming by moving the zoom wheel controller of joystick. These are fundamental functions to surveillance control systems. • Improved recorder controllability This product has employed the JogDial and shuttle ring to improve the control of recorded images. 6 . so that you can control cameras and pan/tilt heads by holding the joystick with one hand. In addition. FEATURES • This product can control cameras. The system controller has improved functions such as camera control. In addition.PREFACE System Controller WV-CU950 and WV-CU650 are designed for setup and operation of cameras and other system units installed in a surveillance system. • One WV-CU950/650 System Controller can control two or more PS·Data system devices. • Authentication by user ID’s and passwords Operation authority (=user level) is assignable to each user ID. The function assignment is possible while watching the LCD. Note: You need to upgrade the software version of Central Processing Unit WJ-MPU955/855/850. and recording devices such as digital disk recorders. • Customization flexibility You can assign frequently-used functions to the function buttons. and search playback.

Do not install it in places where the appliance is exposed to sunlight for long periods of time or near air conditioning equipment. • Do not use strong or abrasive detergents when cleaning the appliance body. Do not strike or shake. or power source ratings. Do not try to operate it in wet areas. To prevent electric shock. Take immediate action if the appliance gets wet. • Do not expose nor operate the appliance in wet/damp conditions. place it at least 5 cm {2 inches} away from the wall. To prevent the appliance from overheating. Moisture can damage the appliance and also cause electric shocks. • Do not operate the appliance beyond its specified temperature. • Handle the appliance with care. This will cause deformation. The appliance may be not linked to a network after turning on in a cold atmosphere between –10 °C and 0 °C {14 °F to 32 °F}. • Do not block the ventilation opening or slots on the cover. Moisture could damage the appliance and also cause electric shocks. it can be linked to a network. humidity. • Do not drop metallic parts through slots. Turn the power off immediately and contact qualified service personnel for service. Use a dry cloth to clean the appliance when it is dirty. • Do not attempt to disassemble the appliance. 7 . Take immediate action if the appliance gets wet. breakdown or malfunction. discoloration. Refer servicing to qualified service personnel. do not remove screws or covers. 60 Hz. Turn the power off and refer servicing to qualified service personnel. Contact qualified service personnel for maintenance. When the dirt is hard to remove. This could permanently damage the appliance. There are no user-serviceable parts inside. • Only use the appliance indoors.PRECAUTIONS • Refer all work related to the installation of this appliance to qualified service personnel or system installers. • Do not use any AC adapter other than the one supplied. use a mild detergent and wipe gently. as this may damage the appliance. • Do not expose the appliance to water or moisture. The input power source for this appliance is 120 V AC. Wait approximately 20 minutes until the inside temperature has risen to 0 °C {32 °F}. Use the appliance under conditions where temperatures are between –10 °C and + 50 °C {14 °F to 122 °F}. and humidity below 90 %.

3. 2. some details on connections. • The operating procedures of digital disk recorder differ depending on models. and operations are different from those described in this document. This document uses the following terms for classification.10 or later Note: Refer to WJ-MPU955 Operating Instructions for details on connections.xx: Ver. WJ-HD316. settings. Term WJ-HD300 Series WJ-HD500 Series WJ-HD200 Series WJ-HD100 Series Examples of Model Nos. System controller: Panasonic System Controller WV-CU950/650 Caution(s): Caution statements identify conditions or practices that could result in damage to this product or injury. 3. and operations. Addendum for WV-CU950/650 and WJ-SX150 Series • When connecting Central Processing Unit WJ-MPU855/850 with System Controller WV-CU950/650. Note: If Matrix Switcher WJ-SX150A is connected to the system controller. WJ-HD500B WJ-HD200. Note(s): Note statements identify special instruction.10 or later Note: Refer to System 850 Matrix Switcher Operating Instructions for details on connections. The available software versions are as follows.xx: Ver. 2. refer to the following document. When you use System Controller WVCU950 or WV-CU650 in modes other than PS·Data. and operations. 4.xx: Ver. Begins with "WJ-HD200" or "WJ-HD220". 2. 4. Refer to the operating instructions of system devices for details. WJ-HD309A WJ-HD500. the operating procedures differ depending on system connections. WJ-HD316A. The available software versions are as follows.10 or later Ver. or side comment related to the topic. settings. Ver. check the software version of central processing unit.04 or later supports this system controller. Begins with "WJ-HD500". check the software version of central processing unit. • When connecting Central Processing Unit WJ-MPU955 with System Controller WV-CU950/650. rule. The different details are described in the following document. Addendum for WV-CU950/650 and WJ-SX150 Series 8 . 1. NOTIFICATION ABOUT SYSTEM UNITS • Matrix Switcher WJ-SX150 Series Ver.DOCUMENT CONVENTION • This document uses the following convention when describing the use and operation of this unit. settings. WJ-HD309. However. Ver. Begins with "WJ-HD316" or "WJ-HD309". NOTIFICATION ABOUT OPERATION MODES This document describes only operating procedures performed in the PS·Data mode.xx: Ver. 1. Begins with "WJ-HD100". WJ-HD220 WJ-HD100 Remarks on Model Nos.60 or later Ver.

DETAILED PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 9 .

press this button in combination with buttons associated with special functions. this button cancels (resets) all the alarm inputs at a time. • In the terminal mode. r Shift button (SHIFT) To activate the alternate function of each button. "ALM SUSPEND" indicator lights up.) Note: Available functions differ depending on connected devices. When an alarm is suspended. t Clear button (CLEAR) Clears the parameter entered with numeric buttons. this function is reserved for future use. 10 . this button cancels (resets) all the alarm inputs at a time. Note: In the PS·Data mode. and manual operation of alarm-related camera becomes available. i Alarm/Alarm suspend button (ALARM/ALM SUSPEND) • When you press while holding down the SHIFT button. q Operation indicator (OPERATE) This indicator is lighting while power is supplied to the system controller. this button cancels (resets) a selected alarm input. y Alarm reset/Alarm all reset button (ALM RESET/ ALM ALL RESET) • In the PS·Data mode. this button temporarily stops alarm inputs to all the system units. • In the terminal mode. when you press while holding down the SHIFT button. u Alarm Acknowledge button (ACK) This button acknowledges a selected alarm input. e Alarm suspend indicator (ALM SUSPEND) This indicator lights up when an alarm is suspended.MAJOR OPERATING CONTROLS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS I Main Unit G Front View #9 $0 #8 r $1 q w e $2 $33 t $4 i u !0 y ADJUST MENU F1 F2 F3 WV-CU950 F4 EXIT ENTER ALARM ACK ALM RESET SYSTEM CONTROLLER !5 !1 !3 !4 !7 !6 !8 @0 !9 @3 @2 @1 !2 o ALM ALL RESET ALM SUSPEND FUNC ALM RECALL CAM OSD SYS FUNC MON LOCK HISTORY CLEAR SHIFT ALM OPERATE ALARM SUSPEND RECORDER UNIT REC STOP PRESET PGM PRESET CAM POSI SEQ PAUSE TOUR SEQ STOP PLAY/PAUSE REC OUT UP SEQ LOG SEQ STOP GRO TO LAST EL-ZOOM GO MULTI SCREEN SHUTTLE HOLD 1 4 FWD 2 5 8 0 @9 #0 #1 #2 #4 #3 #5 #6 #7 3 6 9 CAM (SET) AUX1 ON AUX2 ON MARK REV 7 + MON (ESC) OFF WIPER OFF DEF ON SEARCH — T&D SEARCH OFF @4 @5 @7 @8 @6 @8 (This is the illustration of WV-CU950. Blinking changes to steady light when the alarm is automatically reset. Note: ALM ALL RESET is reserved for future use. w Alarm indicator (ALARM) This indicator blinks when an alarm is activated.

Every pressing this button can change multiscreen segment patterns. !0 Alarm recall button (ALM RECALL) Displays the log of alarms activated in the past. (Single frame skip) • When rotated to the right. • When you press while holding down the SHIFT button. the date and time appears on the LCD for time & date search playback. When there is no newer record.) Note: This button is available only for Digital Disk Recorder WJ-HD300 Series. @5 Play/Pause button (PLAY/PAUSE) • Starts the search playback of recorded images.) (Fast reverse) • Moves the cursor to the next or previous item on the LCD. @4 Stop button (STOP) Stops the playback of recorded images. (Refer to the operating instructions of recorder. You can start playback at the start point. !7 Multiscreen selection button (MULTI SCREEN) Divides a monitor screen in multiscreen segments to display camera images simultaneously. this button runs an assigned group sequence. @7 Shuttle ring (Outside)/JogDial (Inside) Shuttle ring: • When rotated to the right. !9 Auxiliary 2 ON/OFF button (AUX 2 ON/OFF) • Turns on an auxiliary device (AUX 2). this button turns off the defroster. playback start point will be marked. (The available patterns differ depending on recorders. !6 Electronic zoom button (EL-ZOOM) Enlarges an image presently displayed on an active monitor. o Camera function/System function button (CAM FUNC/SYS FUNC) • Recalls a function of camera by the function number. • When pressed during playback. @2 Defroster button (DEF ON/OFF) • Turns on a defroster of camera housing . @6 Recording button (REC) • Pressing this button starts recording by a recorder. (Fast-forward) • When rotated to the left. this button turns off the auxiliary device (AUX 2). • When you press while holding down the SHIFT button. @0 Auxiliary 1 ON/OFF button (AUX 1 ON/OFF) • Turns on an auxiliary device (AUX 1). @1 Search/Time and date search button (SEARCH/ T&D SEARCH) • Activates search functions of recorders. this button pauses the playback. • When you press this button while holding down the SHIFT button. !2 Monitor lock/Logout button (MON LOCK/LOGOUT) • Every time you press. !4 Sequence pause/Sequence stop button (SEQ PAUSE/SEQ STOP) • Pauses a sequence. • When you press while holding down the SHIFT button. • Pressing this button for two seconds stops the recording. • When you press while holding down the SHIFT button. @3 Wiper button (WIPER) Turns on or off a wiper of camera housing. this button turns off the auxiliary device (AUX 1). • Moves to the next or previous main item on the function list. • When you press while holding down the SHIFT button. playback will be skipped to the next record. JogDial: • Plays back recorded images frame by frame when this dial is rotated during playback pause. Note: This function is available only in the PS·Data mode.) !8 Mark button (MARK) When you press this button during playback. Note: This function is available only when the system controller is connected to System 850 Matrix Switcher. this button selects an alarm input. this button recalls a function of external system unit by the function number. • When you press while holding down the SHIFT button. the playback image is fast-forwarded. this button stops a sequence. !5 Go to last button (GO TO LAST) Plays back the latest recorded image. this button activates and deactivates monitor lock. • When you press while holding down the SHIFT button. you can log out of the system. !3 Tour sequence/Group sequence button (TOUR SEQ/GROUP SEQ) • Runs an assigned tour sequence on a selected monitor for the specified duration. normal playback will be continued.• When you press after entering numeric buttons. (Skip) 11 . the image is rewound. !1 On-screen display button (OSD) Toggles the display items on the active monitor. (The playback speed differs depending on recorders.

• Moves to the next or previous sub item on the function list. • In the terminal mode. $2 Exit button (EXIT) While a menu function. $3 Enter button (ENTER) While menu functions are displayed on the LCD. • When you press while holding down the SHIFT button. During setup. @8 Shuttle hold button (SHUTTLE HOLD) • If you press this button while rotating the shuttle ring. • In the PS·Data mode. #0 – button (–) This button is pressed when selecting a camera with the lower channel number. and OSD buttons are unavailable. The LCD also displays the functions assigned to F1 to F8 buttons. $4 Feet When extending these feet. When you hold the playback speed from the system controller. monitor numbers. and top buttons).39 in. this button is pressed to return to the upper menu. you can raise the front side by approx.) Note: This operation differs from “Hold playback speed” performed by holding the shuttle ring of recorder. (Skip) • Selects a parameter setting or a character on setup menus. B. this button determines the current selection to return to the main menu. LCD contrast. alarm buzzer. @9 History button (HISTORY) When you press the + or – button while holding down this button. this button recalls functions you have assigned. $1 Function buttons (F1 to F4/F5 to F8) • In the PS·Data mode. normal playback will be continued. #1 + button (+) This button is pressed when selecting a camera with the higher channel number. this button activates a function displayed on the LCD. or button buzzer. 12 . When there is no former record. #3 Preset/Program preset button (PRESET/PGM PRESET) • Recalls a preset position or the home position of combination camera. #2 Recorder/Unit Selection button (RECORDER/UNIT) • Selects a recorder. • When pressed during setup. this button is pressed to increase the value of selected parameter. when you press while holding down the SHIFT button. #8 LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) Displays the numbers of unit. 1 to 9) Enters camera numbers. and displays the submenu on the LCD. the EL-ZOOM. is being displayed on the LCD. monitor and camera currently selected.• When rotated to the left.}. this button is pressed to decrease the value of selected parameter. determined with the ENTER button. #9 Adjustment button (ADJUST) This button is pressed to perform the settings of LCD brightness. the F1 to F4 buttons become F5 to F8. this button determines the menu selection. this button programs preset positions. this button selects an item to go to a submenu. this button selects a system unit. 1 cm {0. • If you press this button again. camera images selected in the past are displayed in order or in reverse order. • Menu functions are assignable to the function buttons (F1 to F4/F5 to F8) or joystick function buttons (A. #7 Camera/Set button (CAM (SET)) • Selects a camera. Note: This function is available only in the PS·Data mode. normal playback speed is recovered. #5 Numeric buttons (0. • When you press while holding down the SHIFT button. playback will be skipped to the previous record. During setup. #4 Camera position button (CAM POSI) This button is pressed to select the camera position (the combination of camera number and preset position). playback speed will be maintained even after removing a hand from the shuttle ring. or unit numbers. #6 Monitor/Escape button (MON (ESC)) • Selects a monitor. MULTISCREEN. etc. (The LED indicator on this button blinks during the fast playback. $0 Menu button (MENU) • Displays the list of menu functions on the LCD. • When pressed during setup.

$7 Data ports (DATA) • These ports are used for connection with the system controller and other system units via RS-485 communication.) When two or more system controllers are connected in the system. 25 for the setting. $8 Mode Selection switches (MODE) The operation mode of system controller is selected with these switches. this switch determines the unit number of each controller. %1 10/100 Base-T port (10/100 BASE-T) (WV-CU950 only) This port is used for connection with Central Processing Unit WJ-MPU955/855/850 via an Ethernet network. $6 Serial port (SERIAL) This port is used for connection with a PC for system configuration. LINK indicator: This indicator lights up when the system controller is linked to a network through this port. SEE MANUAL CAUTION 10/100 BASE-T ATTENTION JOYSTICK SERIAL DATA MODE CONTOROLLER NO. • These ports used when adding other system controller connections.) If connecting only one system controller in the system. (Refer to p. ACT indicator: This indicator lights up when the system controller receives or sends data through this port. ACT indicator 13 .) %0 DC 9 V Input jack (DC9V IN) An AC adapter. supplied with the system controller.) $5 Joystick connector (JOYSTICK) This connector is used for connection with the joystick. (Refer to p. is plugged into this jack. DC9V IN %1 $5 $6 $7 $8 $9 %0 (This is the illustration of WV-CU950. set this switch to “1”. 24 for the setting.G Rear View CAUTION-CONNECT TO SPECIFED CLASS 2 POWER SUPPLY ONLY. LINK indicator $9 Controller Number switch (CONTROLLER NO.

%5 Focus control buttons (FOCUS NEAR. %3 Zoom wheel controller This controller is used for zooming cameras equipped with specific lenses. %6 A and B buttons (A. FAR) These buttons adjust the lens focus of cameras equipped with specific lenses. %7 3D joystick Controls the panning and tilting of combination cameras and pan/tilt heads. 14 . %4 Iris control buttons (IRIS CLOSE. B) These buttons recall functions you assign.I 3D Joystick Unit This joystick unit is used to operate combination cameras and pan/tilt heads manually. OPEN FAR FOCUS NEAR %4 A IRIS CLOSE %5 B %3 %2 %6 %7 %2 Top button The top button is pressed to recall a function already assigned. OPEN) These buttons close or open the lens iris of cameras equipped with specific lenses.

• Refer to the operating instructions of connected devices for details on LCD display in modes other than PS·Data. the model number displayed on the LCD is "CM2080". the unit number of connected system unit is displayed. When you select a system unit. 1 to 999 can be displayed as a camera number. may differ from the actual status. e Model number/Unit number • The model number of connected system unit is displayed. "Seq" is displayed. You can display F5 to F8 function names while holding down the SHIFT button. Notes: • Some parts of LCD displays. function numbers “F1” to “F4” are displayed. w Camera number • The number of selected camera is displayed. You can edit the function names in up to 20 alphanumeric characters. r Function number (F1 to F8)/LCD title • In the factory default. The following are examples of model number display. assigned to function buttons (F1 to F4/F5 to F8).I LCD Display Descriptions The following are examples of LCD display after login in the PS·Data mode. "HD500": Digital Disk Recorder WJ-HD500 Series "SX150A": Matrix Switcher WJ-SX150A Notes: • The model number is abbreviated when an actual model number exceeds 6 characters. • The LCD titles. 1 to 99 can be displayed as a unit number. the unit number of connected system unit appears. 1 to 99 can be displayed as a monitor number. the camera position number is displayed. WV-CM1780. • When a camera position is specified. 15 . or WVCM1480). • Numerics you have entered are displayed on this area. • When you press the RECORDER/UNIT button. G Default Status (LCD Display After Login) Mon02 Cam016 F1 F2 F3 HD316 F4 q Monitor number The number of selected monitor is displayed. described on this document. • When a sequence is activated on the selected monitor. • When you have selected a monitor supporting PS·Data (WV-CM2080. “F5” to “F8” are displayed while holding down the SHIFT button. can also be displayed.

G Blinking In this document. grayed areas on the illustrations mean blinking. e Function name The name of selected menu function is displayed. actions of F5 to F8 buttons are displayed. 58 Menu Function Categories. w Function number The function number of selected menu function is displayed. e Button actions The actions activated by the function (F1 to F4) buttons are displayed. Note: When the selected button function has no button actions. Note: Refer to p. When pressed while holding down the SHIFT button.G Main Menu (Menu Functions) LCD MENU CAM 101 Camera Setup q Category The category of selected menu function is displayed. w Function number The function number of selected menu function is displayed. nothing is displayed on this area.Rst F1 F2 F3 F4 q Function name The name of selected menu function is displayed. G Sub Menu (Menu Functions) Camera Setup 101 On Off Rst A. Mmm/DD/YYYY HH:MM 12 Mar/17/2004 12:00 AM Blinking 16 .

Mon02 Cam016 Busy HD316 Controller No. “Prohibited” blinks on the LCD. (You cannot control the monitor. etc. • When you have selected a system unit disconnected from the system.1 No Exist Error This message is displayed when no system controller is set to CONTROLLER NO. etc. • When you have entered a camera number or menu number. camera level setting. • When you have entered a wrong user ID or password.) Mon02 Cam016 Busy HD316 "Busy" status is activated for a camera. • The illustration is an example in which a camera number other than 1 to 256 has been entered. the monitor number and “Busy” blinks on the LCD. the camera number and “Busy” blinks on the LCD.) • When a selected camera is controlled by a higher-level user. or wait until “Busy” goes out. Busy • When a selected monitor is controlled by a higher-level user. • When you have tried an operation not authorized by the function level setting. 25 CONTROLLER NO. or selected system unit. Switch Setting. gray area on illustration shows blinking. Controller No.G Messages Displayed on the LCD Invalid Prohibited Mon02 Cam016 HD316 Prohibited Invalid This message is displayed in the following circumstances. select another monitor.) • To cancel the Busy status. 1 (Refer to p. (You cannot control the camera. “Prohibited” blinks on the LCD. Notes: • After a few seconds. that is not existing. “Prohibited” blinks on the LCD.1 No Exist Error "Busy" status is activated for a monitor. • When you have forgotten to select a system unit or monitor before selecting a camera.1. the LCD display will return to the default status. • In this document. • After a few seconds. Check that a system controller is set to CONTROLLER NO. 17 . this message will automatically disappear.

18 .

INSTALLATIONS AND SYSTEM CONNECTIONS 19 .

SEE MANUAL CAUTION 10/100 BASE-T ATTENTION JOYSTICK SERIAL DATA MODE CONTOROLLER NO. Note: The connection example shown in this document is available in the PS·Data mode. 24 and 25 for details on settings. DC9V IN Fixed Line termination: ON PS·Data Mode OFF 78 901 ON MODE CONTROLLER NO. refer to the operating instructions of connected devices. When applying connections in a mode other than PS·Data.INSTALLATIONS AND CONNECTIONS WARNING The installations described in the figures should be made by qualified service personnel or system installers. 20 45 6 ALARM RESET SUSPEND SET UP SET ESC SUSPEND SET UP SET ESC 3 4 1 2 Data Multiplex Unit WJ-MP204 Data Multiplex Unit WJ-MP204C (Two units) Unit Address: 2 and 3 Daisy Chain Connection Kit WV-CA48/10K 456 2 3 45 6 ••• 4 PS·Data To PS·Data ports 1 2 23 . Camera 1 Camera 8 Camera 9 to Camera 12 Camera 13 to Camera 16 ••• ••• ••• 1 7 8 •••••• UNIT 9 0 1 4 ALARM ALARM SUSPEND POWER ON OFF 1 UNIT 9 0 1 •••••• ALARM RESET 2 3 4 ALARM ALARM SUSPEND 7 8 POWER ON OFF 1 2 3 4 Data Multiplex Unit WJ-MP204 1 ••• 4 PS·Data 1 1 Monitor 1 ••• 8 9 ••• 12 13 ••• 16 1 5 2 6 10/0 14 3 7 11 15 4 8 12 16 Monitor 2 9 13 Digital Disk Recorder WJ-HD300 Series Unit Address (System) : Unit Address (Controller) : Line termination: OFF Used when adding other WV-CU950/650 system controllers (Available up to 3) Modular cable (supplied) System Controller WV-CU950/650 (Main unit) CAUTION-CONNECT TO SPECIFED CLASS 2 POWER SUPPLY ONLY. I Basic System Connections The following is an example in which a recorder and data multiplex units are connected.: 1 Refer to pp.

turn the adjusting screw to the right or left. Bottom side Adjusting screw Up Down DOWN UP 21 . Cable (supplied) Combination code label Fit the cable into the cable trench. SEE MANUAL DOWN CAUTION 10/100 BASE-T ATTENTION JOYSTICK SERIAL DATA MODE CONTOROLLER NO.I Connection with the 3D Joystick Unit Connect the main unit and 3D joystick unit as follows. I Adjustment of 3D Joystick To adjust the altitude of 3D joystick. Note: Use the main unit and 3D joystick unit whose combination codes are identical. Bottom side Main unit 3D joystick unit CAUTION-CONNECT TO SPECIFED CLASS 2 POWER SUPPLY ONLY. DC9V IN UP Cable connector Combination code label has been stuck on the bottom.

22 .

WV-CU950/650 SETUP PROCEDURES 23 .

25 CONTROLLER NO. Note: Refer to the operating instructions of connected devices for details on connections and operations. 1 OFF ON MODE Switch #5 (Line termination switch) 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Ethernet mode To apply this mode. etc. You will set up the communication mode and line termination ON/OFF of RS-485 communication. Notes: • Before the setting. Switch Setting. (Refer to p.) G Setting for PS·Data Mode If using only one system controller Set the MODE Switch #5 to ON. Set the Line termination switch of other system controllers to OFF. G Setting for Connection with Central Processing Unit (WJ-MPU955 Series/WJ-MPU855 Series/ WJ-MPU850 Series) Terminal mode Note: Refer to "Setting for Terminal Mode" in this page for the switch setting.) • Do not move the MODE switches to positions other than described in these illustrations. set the MODE Switch #4 and #5 to ON.) 3.) Note: Before performing WV-CU950/650 setups. 1. You will perform this setting when using two or more system controllers in daisy chain connections. (Refer to p.) 2. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 I MODE Switch Setting You will perform the setting of the MODE switches at the rear panel. Set the MODE switches. That may cause malfunction. turn off the system controller.) OFF ON System units Line termination ON Line termination OFF Line termination OFF Line termination OFF Line termination ON G Setting for Terminal Mode Set the MODE Switch #1 and #5 to ON. OFF ON Note: Refer to the operating instructions of connected devices for details on connections and operations.SETUP PROCEDURES (HARDWARE) I Setup Procedures Perform the setup as follows. 36 Power-off. (Refer to p. (Refer to p. 26. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 2. Set the MODE Switch #5 of the system controller at the chain end to ON. switches. Set CONTROLLER NO. (Refer to MODE Switch Setting. you need to log into the system by entering the administrator password. 24 . You will perform the settings concerning password and communication between system controllers and other system units. Perform WV-CU650 setups after entering the administrator password. 26. 1 OFF ON 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 If using two or more system controllers in daisy chain connections 1.

set the unique number for each system controller.I CONTROLLER NO.) If using two or more system controllers in daisy chain connections Up to 4 system controllers are connectable in the system. • One of the system controllers must be set to "1". 23 78 CONTROLLER NO. G Setting for PS·Data/Terminal Mode If using only one system controller Maintain the switch setting as “1 (factory default position)”. the Unit Address (Controller) setting must be different from each CONTROLLER NO. switch setting. (Refer to the operating instructions of recorder for details on the setting. To avoid conflict. switch at the rear panel. Notes: • “0” and “9” are reserved numbers. They cannot be set for controller numbers. 456 25 . • To connect Digital Disk Recorder WJ-HD300 Series to system controllers. Switch Setting You will determine controller-number settings by moving the CONTROLLER NO. 901 G Setting for Connection with Central Processing Unit (WJ-MPU955 Series/WJ-MPU855 Series/ WJ-MPU850 Series) Maintain the switch setting as “1 (factory default position)”.

The passwords of up to 16 operators can be displayed on the LCD.* PS·Data communication setting can be performed. tilting. refer to p. operator password check. tilting. B. and zooming calibration settings are not restored. and zooming will be maintained even after all reset. and button buzzer settings • Button functions and joystick button functions (F1 to F8. Notes: • You cannot change the system from the following modes (refer to the diagram) to the normal operation mode. • Administrator password • PS·Data communication setting • LCD brightness. • Take a note of your administrator password. you need to enter the administrator password. and database copy will become available. all reset. and top buttons) • Controller functions (Time & Date Type) (Auto Login) (Operator Setup) (Function Level) (Camera Level) (Cam Posi Map) (Cam-Unit Map) (HDD-Unit Map) (LCD Title) Note: Calibration settings of panning. turn off the system controller. the system will run in an associated setting mode. However.SETUP PROCEDURES (FIRMWARE) I Administrator Password Entry If you log into the system in the administrator mode. contrast. alarm buzzer. To activate the administrator mode. 4. 1) to a destination system controller. To change the setting. I All Reset When the all reset mode is activated. 26 . A. PS·Data communication setting. and then turn on the controller again. Notes: • The factory default of administrator password is “650”. all of the following settings will be reset to the factory default. for security. you should change the password setting. MON (ESC) and 1 MON (ESC) and 2 PS·Data database copy I Setting Modes If you power on the system controller while pressing the following buttons. The PS·Data database can be copied from the source system controller (Controller No. 31. MON (ESC) and 4 PS·Data password display * The panning. Buttons pressed while the power-on 2. The administrator password can be changed. • The administrator password entry is required for the following modes. and 6 Setting Mode Description All reset MON (ESC) and 6 PS·Data Communication setting Administrator password change The communication settings and PS·Data database can be restored to the factory default. To start up the normal operation mode.

the LCD display will return to Step 2. Enter the administrator password. Setup” will appear on the LCD again to reenter the password. 5. Turn off the power. The password entered will be displayed as “∗” marks. Press the CAM (SET) button. all the settings will be reset to the factory default. All Reset PS • Data Com. press the CLEAR button. Press the CAM (SET) button. 2. • You can change the setting item display on the LCD by rotating the JogDial. Setup Admin Password ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ Notes: • The factory default is “650”. PS • Data Com. 4. G Operation 1. “Admin Password” will appear on the LCD to enter the password. Check “End” has appeared on the LCD to inform you of the initialization end. “Admin Password” will appear on the LCD to enter the password. PS • Data Com. I PS·Data Communication Setting This setting is required to establish a connection between the system units and system controller. you can skip entering the administrator password in Step 3. Check “End” on the LCD. All Reset Admin Password ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ Notes: • The factory default is “650”. Turn on the power while holding down the button 6 and MON (ESC) button. If the password entered is correct. and 6. All Reset Admin Password _____ 3. The password entered will be displayed as “∗” marks. • To delete a character. 4. List of PS·Data communication settings Setting Item Baud Rate Data Bit Parity Bit Stop Bit Wait Time Available setting parameter(s) 4800 / 9600 / 19200 bps 8 bit (Fixed) None / Odd / Even 1 / 2 bit OFF / 100 msec / 200 msec / 400 msec / 1000 msec Group Adr A to Z Xon/Xoff Not Use (Fixed) Note: Factory defaults are underlined. 27 . 4. Setup Admin Password _____ 3. press the CLEAR button. Turn off the power. 2. Enter the administrator password. If the password entered is correct. Turn on the power while holding down the buttons 2. Setup Baud Rate 9600 Notes: • If the password entered is wrong. “PS·Data Com. All Reset End 6. "Baud Rate" setting form will appear on the LCD. • If you have entered a wrong password. • To delete a character. Turn off the power.G Operation 1. Note: If you set the MODE Switch #1 to #4 to ON.

4. The speed of communication between the system controller and other system units Parity bit PS • Data Com. Setup Baud Rate 9600 (No need for setup) Remain the factory default. Setup Cnt G—Adr. Press the MON (ESC) button. Otherwise. You can select the desired parameter from “19200”. Setup Stop Bit 1 The stop bit. communication will not be established between the system controller and system units. (Refer to Step 5 in Operation. 29 for details.) PS • Data Com. Setup Baud Rate 9600 3. Setup Baud Rate 4800 28 . System unit group address Baud rate PS • Data Com.) Controller group address PS • Data Com. Select an item you wish to set up by rotating the JogDial. The wait time until the data is sent again (Refer to p. A (No need for setup) Remain the factory default. The factory default is “9600”. Setup Baud Rate 4800 PS • Data Com. or pressing the + or – button. The LCD display will change from the display mode to the editing mode. 29 for details.5. 7.) G Baud Rate Setting 1. added to the data. Refer to p. The selected parameter will be determined. Setup Parity Bit None The parity bit.) 2. 6. Setup Sys G—Adr. added to the last of data. in asynchronous communication (Refer to p. Wait time PS • Data Com. After you have completed the settings. Press the CAM (SET) button. PS • Data Com. Select a desired parameter by rotating the JogDial. Stop bit PS • Data Com. Setting procedures differ depends on items. Select “Baud Rate” by rotating the JogDial. Perform the settings. 28 to 30 for how to operate. Setup Wait Time Off Note: Conform this parameter to the baud rate of other system units. and “4800”. “9600”. 29 for details. to perform parity check (Refer to p. turn off the power. PS • Data Com. and the LCD display will return from the editing mode to the display mode.

The LCD display will change from the display mode to the editing mode. Press the CAM (SET) button. 28 Operation. 28 Operation. PS • Data Com. (Refer to Step 5 in p. Setup Parity Bit Even 4. “400”. Setup Wait Time 100 4.G Parity Bit Setting 1. (Refer to Step 5 in p. The LCD display will change from the display mode to the editing mode. PS • Data Com. “100 (msec)”. PS • Data Com. The factory default is “None”. “Odd”. Setup Stop Bit 2 PS • Data Com. and “Even”. Select a desired parameter by rotating the JogDial or pressing the + or – button. Press the CAM (SET) button. Select “Stop Bit” by rotating the JogDial.) 2. and the LCD display will return from the editing mode to the display mode. The factory default is “1”. (Refer to Step 5 in p.) 2. G Stop Bit Setting 1. and the selected parameter will be determined. and the LCD display will return from the editing mode to the display mode. Select a desired parameter by rotating the JogDial or pressing the + or – button. Press the MON (ESC) button. G Wait Time Setting 1. PS • Data Com. PS • Data Com. Setup Parity Bit Even PS • Data Com. Setup Wait Time Off 3. Select a desired parameter by rotating the JogDial or pressing the + or – button. 4. Setup Stop Bit 2 29 . Select “Wait Time” by rotating the JogDial. PS • Data Com. Press the CAM (SET) button. The selected parameter will be determined. Setup Wait Time 100 PS • Data Com. You can select the desired parameter from “None”. You can select the desired parameter from “Off”. and “1000”. “200”. Setup Parity Bit None 3. Press the MON (ESC) button. The selected parameter will be determined. Setup Stop Bit 1 3. 28 Operation. Select “Parity Bit” by rotating the JogDial.) 2. Press the MON (ESC) button. The LCD display will change from the display mode to the editing mode. You can select the desired parameter from “1” (bit) and “2”. The LCD display will return from the editing mode to the display mode.

Setup Sys G—Adr. and the LCD display will return to the display mode. A 01 OK After a second. B 30 . Setup Sys G—Adr. PS • Data Com. Setup Sys G—Adr. Setup Cnt G—Adr.” by rotating the JogDial.) 2. and repeat Step 3 to 6. 1. Press the CAM (SET) button. PS • Data Com. B 3. Press the CAM (SET) button. and the cursor will jump to the sub parameter. PS • Data Com. PS • Data Com. Select “Sys G-Adr.” by rotating the JogDial. the LCD display will return to the status in Step 5. Press the MON (ESC) button. If you set the unit numbers of other system units.) 2. Note: If the parameters cannot be determined. Press the MON (ESC) button. 8. 1. The parameter will be determined. PS • Data Com. 28 Operation. The LCD display will return to the status in Step 2. You can select the desired parameter from “A” to “Z”. A G Group Address Setting for System Units Note: Remain the factory default. 28 Operation. repeat Step 5. PS • Data Com. PS • Data Com. A 4. Enter the unit number of system unit by rotating the JogDial or pressing the + or – button. Select a desired parameter by rotating the JogDial or pressing the + or – button. recover the factory default as follows. Press the CAM (SET) button. The factory default is 01. When you have mistakenly changed the setting. 6. 7. The LCD display will change from the display mode to the editing mode. Setup Cnt G—Adr. The LCD display will return from the editing mode to the display mode. A 4. Setup Sys G—Adr. and "OK" will appear on the LCD. (Refer to Step 5 in p. PS • Data Com. The factory default is “A”. (Refer to Step 5 in p. The selected parameter will be determined. check the unit number of system unit. Select “Cnt G-Adr. When you have mistakenly changed the setting. A 01 Note: 1 to 99 is available for the unit number.G Group Address Setting for System Controller Note: Remain the factory default. Press the MON (ESC) button again. Setup Sys G—Adr. "NG" will appear on the LCD. Press the CAM (SET) button. In this case. A 05 5. Setup Cnt G—Adr. Select "A" by rotating the JogDial or pressing the + or – button. The LCD display will change from the display mode to the editing mode. The sub parameter will be determined. 3. recover the factory default as follows.

Enter the current administrator password. If the password entered is correct. “Old Password” entry form will appear. G Operation 1. The factory default is “650”. Press the CAM (SET) button. press the CLEAR button. Enter the old password again. 6. Enter the current administrator password again. and “Memory” will appear on the LCD. • To delete a character. Turn off the power. 4. Admin Password Setup New Password ∗∗∗∗∗ 10. 7. The password entered will be displayed as “∗” marks. 2. “End” will appear on the LCD. Admin Password Setup Old Password _____ 5. Admin Password Setup Old Password ∗∗∗∗∗ Note: To delete a character. press the CLEAR button. Enter the old password again.I To Change the Administrator Password You can change the administrator password. Admin Password Setup New Password ∗∗∗∗∗ 8. The password entered will be displayed as “∗” marks. Admin Password Setup Memory Then. Admin Password Setup Admin Password _____ 3. “New Password” entry form will appear again. Press the CAM (SET) button. the LCD display will return to Step 4. 31 . The password entered will be displayed as “∗” marks. Enter the new administrator password again. Admin Password Setup End Note: If the new password entered is wrong. Enter a new administrator password. the LCD display will return to Step 4. The password entered will be displayed as “∗” marks. Admin Password Setup Admin Password ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ Notes: • The factory default is “650”. If the password entered is correct. “New Password” entry form will appear. Admin Password Setup New Password _____ Note: If the old password entered is wrong. Press the CAM (SET) button. Turn on the power while holding down the button 1 and MON (ESC) button. Turn off the power. 11. Press the CAM (SET) button. The new password has been memorized in the system. “1” to “99999” are available for the password. Admin Password Setup New Password _____ 9. “Admin Password” entry form will appear to perform the setting.

Press the CAM (SET) button. and the LCD display of source system controller becomes as follows. • To activate this mode. 36 Power-on for software version. 2. Turn on the power of destination system controller.xx system controllers.) If you try to copy the database. Data Base Copy Mode Admin Password ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ Note: The factory default is “650”. 7. switch of source system controller to “1”. 3. Data Base Tx Mode Completed 60% The LCD display of destination system controller(s) become(s) as follows. you can copy the following settings. Login is not required. Data Base Rx Mode Failed Sum=0000 Data Base Rx Mode G Operation 1. switch is set to 1. 5. the LCD display of source system controller becomes as follows. 27 PS·Data Communication Setting. Data Base Tx Mode “Enter SET Button” The LCD display of destination system controller(s) become(s) as follows. 9. such as WV-CU360C. Turn on the power of source system controller while holding down the button 2 and MON (ESC) buttons. The password entered will be displayed as “∗” marks. The database copy will be started. “Admin Password” will appear on the LCD to enter the password. You cannot copy the PS·Data database to other models. (Refer to p. • Administrator password • Button functions and joystick button functions (F1 to F8. Disconnect the system units from source and destination system controllers. • You cannot copy the database from Ver. (Refer to p. A. When using two or more system controllers in the system. 1. and that of destination system controllers to “2” to “8”. the LCD display will become as follows. 4.) • This function is available only among WV-CU950/650 System Controllers. and the copying will be canceled. 25 CONTROLLER NO. 2. you need to perform the PS·Data communication settings.) Note: Set a unique number for each system controller to avoid conflict. (Refer to p. Switch Setting. Connect system controllers with modular cables. and top buttons) • Controller functions (Time & Date Type) (Auto Login) (Operator Setup) (Function Level) (Camera Level) (Cam Posi Map) (Cam-Unit Map) (HDD-Unit Map) (LCD Title) Notes: • Database copy to two or more system controllers is available at a time. Enter the administrator password. Set the CONTROLLER NO. Data Base Copy Mode Admin Password _____ 8.xx system controllers to Ver. 6. Data Base Rx Mode Completed 60% 32 .I PS·Data Database Copy You can copy the database from the source system controller (CONTROLLER NO. switch is set to 2 to 8. If the password entered is correct. Set the MODE switches of source and destination system controllers to “PS·Data” mode. 10.) to destination system controllers (CONTROLLER NO.). B. Turn off the power of source and destination system controllers. Press the CAM (SET) button of the source system controller.

Turn on the power of system controller while holding down the button 4 and MON (ESC) button. 33 . • If the password entered is wrong. The LCD display of source system controller becomes as follows. 12. Turn off the power. Press the CAM (SET) button. Rotate the JogDial. 2. 5.02 User ID 1 Password 12345 Rotate the JogDial. the administrator can check the passwords in the following procedure. Enter the administrator password.01 User ID Password 650 650 Data Base Tx Mode Completed Sum=1733 Note: If the check sum is not identical. G Operation 1. PSD Password Check Admin Password _____ 3. • • Operator 16 information No. 6. The password entered will be displayed as “∗” marks. rotate the JogDial. the check sum (SUM=nnnn) appears on the LCD of each system controller. Operator 2 information No. and retry the data base copy. If the password entered is correct. Rotate the JogDial. When the copy has been completed. check the connection of all the controllers.11. The user ID and password of Operator 1 to 16 will appear interchangeably. “Admin Password” will appear on the LCD to enter the password.16 User ID Password 100 100 I PS·Data Operator Password Check In case operators have forgotten their passwords. No.01 User ID Password 650 650 Data Base Rx Mode Completed Sum=1733 The LCD display of destination system controller(s) becomes as follows. 4. “User ID” and “Password” of Operator 1 will appear on the LCD while you are holding down the buttons. Turn off the power of source and destination system controllers. When the copy has been successfully completed. PSD Password Check Admin Password ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ Notes: • The factory default is “650”. Turn off the power. To search a desired operator. Operator 1 information No. the LCD display will return to Step 2. the check sum is identical to each other.

34 .

OPERATING PROCEDURES (PS·DATA) 35 .

the OPERATE indicator will light up. 1.) 2.1 Controller number appears. Plug the supplied AC adapter into an AC 120 V outlet.) When leaving away from the system controller for a long time Log out of the system and unplug the AC adapter from the AC outlet. (Lighting until login) 36 .0 seconds) PS·Data Mode Controller No. and the software version → controller number → login standby display will appear on the LCD. 40. Log out from the system. If the AC adapter is kept plugged into the AC outlet. confirm the system composition. power off the system controller as follows. some functions may be unavailable. DC 9 V plug DC9V IN DC 9 V Input Jack The power will be turned on. 1.0 second) PS·Data Mode No User Login standby display appears. Insert the DC 9 V plug into the DC 9 V Input Jack at the rear panel. the adapter will consume electricity even after the DC 9 V plug is removed from the DC 9 V Input Jack. Then.2.BEFORE OPERATION I Power-on Before operation. Ver. the OPERATE indicator will go out. Depending on system composition. AC outlet Clamp (Fastens the supplied AC adapter's AC adapter power cord. 2. (Lighting for 2. The power will be turned off. Power is turned on. Unplug the AC adapter from the AC outlet.00 Software version appears. I Power-off After operation. (Lighting for 1. (Refer to p. Then.

I Basic Operation Flow

Login

Login
Unit selection

System Unit Selection
Alarm suspension or reset
Monitor selection Operation (Multiscreen segment switching and sequence Camera selection Operation (Panning, Tilting, and zooming, etc.)

System Operation

Monitor Selection

System Unit Setup and Operation

Camera Selection

Camera setup and control
Logout at the end of operation

Logout

37

I LCD/Buzzer Adjustment
You can perform the settings of LCD brightness, LCD contrast, alarm buzzer, or button buzzer as follows. 1. Press the ADJUST button to select a desired menu. Every pressing the button will display the brightness setting menu → contrast setting menu → alarm buzzer setting menu → button buzzer setting menu interchangeably. Note: If no adjustment has been performed for 5 seconds or more, these setting menus will automatically disappear and the LCD will return to the default status. 2. After adjustment, press the MON (ESC) or EXIT button. The LCD display will return to the default status.

G Button Buzzer Setting
You will perform the setting whether to activate a sound when a button is pressed. Select the desired parameter by rotating the JogDial.

Buzzer Operation

On

Notes: • Off or On is selectable. The factory default is On. • If set to On, short buzzer will sound three times in the following occasions. (p. 17) Invalid, Prohibited (p. 73) Level 1 Fixed

LCD Bright

14

I Operation Start (Login)
Before starting operation, user authentication by the ID and password is required. (Refer to p. 72 Operator Registration or Change for details on the setting of ID and password.) Notes: • User authentication is skipped when the auto login is set to ON. (Refer to p. 71.) • If no operation has been performed for 5 seconds or more, the LCD display will return to the login standby display. • The factory default of operator information is as follows.
Operator No. 1 2 3 4 5 User ID 650 1 100 101 102 103 Password 650 12345 100 101 102 103 Function level 1 1 2 3 3 3 Camera level 1 1 1 1 1 1

G Brightness Level Adjustment
You can change the brightness level by rotating the JogDial. Adjust the LCD brightness level while watching the LCD. Note: 1 (lowest) to 20 (highest) are available. The factory default is 14.

G Contrast Level Adjustment
You can change the contrast level by rotating the JogDial. Adjust the contrast level while watching the LCD.

LCD Contrast

9

Note: 1 (highest) to 20 (lowest) are available. The factory default is 9.

6

1. Turn on the power. (Refer to p. 36 Power-on and Poweroff.)

G Alarm Buzzer Setting
You can change the duration time of alarm buzzer sound by rotating the JogDial. Adjust the alarm buzzer setting while watching the LCD.

2. Wait until the login standby display appears.

PS·Data Mode No User
3. Press the CAM (SET) button. “User ID” entry form will appear on the LCD.

Buzzer Alarm

2s

Note: OFF, 1s (second), 2s, 3s, 4s, …, 30s, 40s, 50s, and 60s are available. The factory default is 2s.

User ID

_____

38

4. Enter the ID number by pressing the numeric buttons. The user ID entered will appear on the LCD.

User ID

__650

Notes: • To delete a character, press the CLEAR button. • You can also enter your user ID without pressing the CAM (SET) button. 5. Press the CAM (SET) button. When the ID number is correct, “Password” entry form appears on the LCD.

Notes: • The smallest monitor, camera, and unit numbers are displayed on the LCD. • Three seconds after the unit number was determined, model number appears in place of unit number. • When the ID or password is wrong, “Invalid” blinks on the LCD. Then, the LCD returns to the login standby display.

Invalid

User ID Password

650 _____

PS • Data Mode No User
• When a system controller cannot communicate properly with a system unit, the LCD display after login becomes as follows.

6. Enter the password by pressing the numeric buttons. Then, press the CAM (SET) button.

User ID Password

650 __∗ ∗ ∗

Mon-- Cam--- Unit01 Unit Error
In this case, check the connection and settings between the system controller and system unit. (Refer to p. 20.)

Notes: • To delete a character, press the CLEAR button. • The password entered will be displayed as “∗” marks. 7. When the password is correct, “Login OK” appears on the LCD. Then, the LCD changes to the operation display.

Login OK

Mon04 Cam128 Unit16 F1 F2 F3 F4

Mon04 Cam128 F1 F2 F3

HD316 F4

39

I If You Have Forgotten the Login Password
Refer to the system administrator.

I Operation End (Logout)
You need to log out of the system: • When finishing operation and turning off the power • When changing an operator 1. During the login status, press the MON LOCK/LOGOUT button while holding down the SHIFT button. 2. You will log out of the system, and "Logout" will appear on the LCD. Then, the LCD returns to the login standby display.

I Operation Start (Auto Login)
When auto login is set to ON, operators can log into the system without entering their passwords. The LCD display after power-on becomes as follows. (Refer to p. 71 Auto Login/Logout Setup for details on the setting.) 1. When the power is turned on, “Auto Login” appears on the LCD for a second.

Logout

PS • Data Mode Auto Login
2. The user ID of auto login user appear on the LCD. Then, the operator will log into the system automatically.

PS·Data Mode No User
Alarm sign after logout If power is being supplied even after logout, the current system status will be continuously informed by “Alarm sign” and the ALM SUSPEND indicator. If an alarm is newly activated after logout, “Alarm” sign will blink. (The blinking will change to steady light when the alarm is automatically reset.)

PS·Data Mode User ID =

650

Mon01 Cam128 Unit16 F1 F2 F3 F4

Mon01 Cam128 F1 F2 F3

HD316 F4

Notes: • This illustration is an example in which the operator number is “650”. • The smallest monitor, camera, and unit numbers are displayed on the LCD. • Three seconds after the unit number was determined, model number appears in place of unit number. • Due to security, the password is not displayed on the LCD.

40

Press the RECORDER/UNIT button. To display the unit number again. Mon02 Cam016 Unit16 F1 F2 F3 F4 Notes: • Three seconds after. model number will appear in place of unit number. the LCD will return to the status before the system unit selection. “Invalid” will appear on the LCD. Then. Mon02 Cam128 F1 F2 F3 ____2 F4 Mon01 Cam016 F1 F2 F3 ___16 F4 2. I Recorder Selection Notes: • In advance. Then. The system will become ready for control. The entered number will appear on the LCD. Then. • If you have entered a wrong unit number. I System Unit Selection Notes: • In advance. 78 Associating Recorder Numbers with Unit Numbers. 2. (Refer to the operating instructions of system units. Invalid Invalid 41 . Enter a recorder number by pressing numeric buttons. monitor. hold down the RECORDER/UNIT. and system unit number will appear on the LCD. or camera) at the beginning. The system will become ready for control. you need to set HDD-unit maps. and system unit number will appear on the LCD. “Invalid” will appear on the LCD. (Refer to p. 1. you need to set the unit number for each system unit.) • In the factory default. camera number. the monitor number. Recorder 1 to 16 is associated with Unit 1 to 16. The entered number will appear on the LCD. Enter a unit number by pressing the numeric buttons. 1.UNIT SELECTION To control the system. camera number. model number will appear in place of unit number.) • 1 to 99 are available for the unit number. the LCD will return to the status before the recording selection. Mon02 Cam016 F1 F2 F3 HD316 F4 Mon02 Cam016 F1 F2 F3 HD316 F4 • If you have entered a wrong recorder number. Press the RECORDER/UNIT button while holding down the SHIFT button. you need to select a desired unit (system unit. recorder. and the monitor number. Mon02 Cam016 Unit16 F1 F2 F3 F4 Note: Three seconds after.

41 System Unit Selection and Monitor Selection in this page. Camera 1 to 64 is associated with Unit 1 to 4. Then. you can skip system unit selection. Mon02 Cam016 F1 F2 F3 HD316 F4 Mon01 Cam016 F1 F2 F3 HD316 F4 Note: If you have entered a wrong monitor number. Mon01 Cam001 F1 F2 F3 HD316 F4 42 .) 2. In the factory default.) Note: If camera numbers are associated with unit numbers. Select the desired monitor number by pressing the numeric buttons. “Seq-P”: This sign is displayed when a sequence is paused. 77 Associating Camera Numbers with Unit Numbers. Note: If you have entered a wrong camera number (other than 1 to 999). “Invalid” will appear on the LCD. 1. The system will become ready for monitor control. Then. the camera number will appear on the LCD. (Refer to p. you can select a desired monitor. Select a camera number by pressing the numeric buttons. The entered number will appear on the LCD. the LCD will return to the status before the monitor selection. Select a system unit (including a recorder) connected to a monitor you wish to control. You will also perform camera selection when changing camera channels. • You can also select cameras by pressing the + or – button.) Signs displayed on the LCD “Seq”: This sign is displayed when a sequence is activated. Mon02 Cam016 HD316 Invalid Mon01 Cam016 Invalid HD316 I Camera Selection When two or more cameras are connected to a system unit. (Refer to p. 1. Press the MON (ESC) button. Select a system unit and monitor connected to a camera you wish to control. The entered number will appear on the LCD.) * nnn is a camera position number. the monitor will display the image of camera with the higher channel number. The selected system unit does not support monitor selection.-“ appears on the LCD. Mon01 Cam001 F1 F2 F3 ___16 F4 Mon01 Cam016 F1 F2 F3 HD316 F4 2.I Monitor Selection When two or more monitors are connected to a system unit. 41 System Unit Selection. The system will become ready for control. 3. Note: Refer to the operating instructions of system unit for available monitor numbers. When pressing the + button. and the image of selected camera will be displayed on the active monitor. “Mon. (Refer to p. 3. “C-Pnnn*”: This sign is displayed when a camera position is selected. Press the CAM (SET) button. Mon01 Cam016 F1 F2 F3 ___16 F4 Notes: • Refer to the operating instructions of system unit for available camera numbers. Then. When monitor selection is unavailable. (Camera position is the combination of camera number and preset position number. When pressing the – button. “Invalid” will appear on the LCD. the monitor will display the image of camera with the lower channel number. The monitor number will appear on the LCD. you can select a desired camera. the LCD will return to the status before selecting the camera.

1. Images will be displayed in the specified multiscreen segment pattern on the monitor.) 43 . 1. The monitor display will return to the spot mode. in place of the camera number. Every pressing the MULTI SCREEN button can change the multiscreen segment pattern. 42 Monitor Selection. 42 Camera Selection) 2. Every pressing the EL-ZOOM button can change the zooming rate. The camera image on the monitor will be zoomed. 42 Monitor Selection. • If the selected recorder supports sequence pausing. To quit the sequence monitoring. Refer to the operating instructions of system units. 0 1 2 3 4 5 4 segments 7 segments 9 segments 10 segments 13 segments 16 segments Note: Available multiscreen segment patterns differ depending on system units. To move the zoomed area.) Notes: • If you have skipped entering the sequence number in Step 2. • Press the MULTI SCREEN button. press the TOUR SEQ/GROUP SEQ button while holding down the SHIFT button. 41 System Unit Selection and p.) 2. and camera. (Refer to p.) I Multiscreen Display The following procedure is available when a selected system unit (for example. (Refer to the operating instructions of system unit. Tour or Group Sequence 1 will be activated. Select a system unit and monitor. (Refer to p. the sequence setup of system unit is required. During the sequence pause.) 2. (Refer to the operating instructions of system units for details. Select a system unit and monitor.SYSTEM UNIT CONTROL The following are the procedures to control system units (including recorders). 4. Do either of the following. Press the EL-ZOOM button. and “Seq” will appear on the monitor. • Press the desired numeric buttons (refer to the diagram). Mon02 Seq F1 F2 F3 HD316 F4 I Electronic Zooming The following procedure is available when a selected system unit has the electronic zooming function. monitor. press the SEQ PAUSE/SEQ STOP while holding down the SHIFT button. 41 System Unit Selection. (Refer to p. stop the sequence by selecting a camera or activating the multiscreen display. Note: Available zooming rates differ depending on system units. Note: Before performing the procedure. press the TOUR SEQ/GROUP SEQ button. The sequence will be activated. Enter a desired sequence number. 1. To activate a tour sequence. “Seq-P” will appear on the LCD in place of “Seq”. The following procedure is available when a selected system unit has the tour or group sequence monitoring function. you can pause the sequence by pressing the SEQ PAUSE/SEQ STOP button. p. Select a system unit. then press the MULTI SCREEN button. a hard disk recorder) has the multiscreen display function. (Refer to p. Numeric buttons Multiscreen display pattern I Tour Sequence/Group Sequence Sequence monitoring is the function to switch camera images automatically. 41 System Unit Selection and p. 3. and p. To activate a group sequence. according to the order registered in the system unit. 3. move the 3D joystick to desired directions. Note: If the selected system unit does not support sequence stop. 42 Camera Selection or Multiscreen Display in this page. 42 Monitor Selection.

I On-screen Display (OSD) Control You can toggle the OSD information (display parameters such as camera title. I System Function Control You can recall system functions (functions of system units) by pressing the corresponding function numbers. 1. 42 Monitor Selection. and top buttons). 57 MENU FUNCTION DESCRIPTIONS for details. Refer to p. and recorder number) on the active monitor screen. (Refer to p.) 2. The associated system function will be activated. Mon01 Cam001 F1 F2 F3 ____3 F4 1. To toggle the OSD information. 3. monitor number. 42 Monitor Selection. Enter a function number by pressing the numeric buttons. 44 . press the OSD button. you can recall system functions by pressing these buttons. Note: OSD information differs depending on system units. Select a system unit and monitor. Refer to the operating instructions of system units. 41 System Unit Selection and p. B. Refer to the operating instructions of system units for the association of function numbers and system functions. Press the CAM FUNC/SYS FUNC button while holding down the SHIFT button. Note: If you assign system functions to the joystick function buttons (A. Select a desired monitor. (Refer to p.) 2.

or recording event list. etc. To stop playback. 12 @8 Shuttle hold button. I Playback 1. 11 @7 JogDial. Note: The operation details differ depending on recorders. Recording will be started. Note: Refer to the operating instructions of recorder for the available recording modes and total recording time. Operations available during playback Pause: Refer to p. 11 @7 Shuttle ring. Refer to p. described on this document. 11 !85 Mark button. Multiscreen display: Refer to p. press the REC button. 3. Perform operations while watching the active monitor. you can control the following functions of digital disk recorders supporting PS·Data. “Search Mode” menu will appear on the LCD. I Manual Recording 1. 1. Press the SEARCH/T&D SEARCH button. Single frame skip (Forward or backward field advance): Refer to p. 4. Fast forward or fast reverse (Fast-forward or rewind): Refer to p. Notes: • WJ-HD100 Series does not support search playback. Record list → Thumbnail Display → Record List …) • The search list firstly displayed differs depending on recorders. To start the recording. 45 . I Search Playback Recorders have search playback functions based on recording times or recording events.) will be displayed on an active monitor. skip to Step 3. Select a desired recorder. 1. Refer to p.24 or later / WJ-HD220 supports search playback. When searching playback images. 11 @7 JogDial.2 or later / WJ-HD200 Ver. press the PLAY/PAUSE button. may differ from the actual status. G How to Display Search Lists 1. 2.) Search Mode HD300 Thumb Text Copy F1 F2 F3 F4 Example: WJ-HD300 Series Notes: • Every pressing the SEARCH/T&D SEARCH button can change search list display.RECORDER CONTROL From this system controller. To stop the recording. Refer to pp. (Refer to the operating instructions of recorder. press the STOP button. The playback will be started. When camera selection is not necessary. The playback will be stopped. Hold playback speed: Refer to p. (For example. To start playback. 11 !5 Go to last button. Note: The playback start point differs depending on recorders. 2. 42 Camera Selection. press the REC button again for two seconds. and a search list (date-and-time entry form. you can activate these functions from this system controller. 2. 11 !7 Multiscreen selection button. 46 to 48. Note: Some parts of monitor displays. • WJ-HD300 Ver. Marking (WJ-HD300 Series only): Refer to p. Select a camera whose picture you wish to play back. Play the latest recorded image (WJ-HD300 Series only): Refer to p. 11 @5 Play/Pause button. Skip (WJ-HD300 and WJ-HD500 Series): Refer to p. You will control a recorder in the status in which a recorder has been selected. 41 Recorder Selection. record list.

LCD display while the event list is displayed on the monitor Search Mode HD300 Thumb Text Copy F1 F2 F3 F4 LCD display while the thumbnail menu is displayed on the monitor Search Mode HD300 List Text Copy F1 F2 F3 F4 46 .Controls commonly available <Main unit> Shuttle ring clockwise: Moves to the next page. F3 button while holding down the SHIFT button: Cpy1 Specifies the external recording device connected to COPY 1 for the playback media. Note: While holding down the SHIFT button. Record list ↔ Thumbnail Display ↔ Record List …) Top button: Determines the selected parameter or searching filter setting. Zoom wheel controller to the right or left: Changes the search list display. the LCD display will become as follows. MON (ESC) or EXIT button: Closes the search list display. • The DATA COPY window is not displayed while a thumbnail window is displayed. • To close the monitor display activated by the function buttons. F4 button: Copy Displays the DATA COPY window while the recording event. (This button is available for WJHD316A and WJ-HD309. <3D joystick unit> 3D joystick upward (L): Moves the cursor. F1 button while holding down the SHFT button: Nr-A Specifies the normal or event recording area for the playback media. JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise: Changes the selected parameter. (For example. Live image will be displayed again on the monitor. 3D joystick to the left (t): Moves the cursor to the left. press the MON (ESC) or EXIT button. G Operation (WJ-HD300 Series) If you press the SEARCH/T&D SEARCH button. 3D joystick to the right (s): Moves the cursor to the right. 3D joystick downward (M): Moves the cursor. Date-and-time entry form → Recording event list → VMD search list → Marking list → Date-and-time entry form →… Note: To quit search playback. the dateand-time entry form will appear on the monitor. or marking list window is displayed. (This button is available for WJHD316A and WJ-HD309. VMD search. Search Mode HD300 Nr-A Cp-A Cpy1 Cpy2 F1 F2 F3 F4 Available buttons and functions F1 button: Thumb or List Changes the monitor display between the recording event list window and thumbnail menu. F2 button while holding down the SHIFT button: Cp-A Specifies the copy area for the playback media. Shuttle ring counterclockwise: Moves to the previous page. The search list display will change as follows. The following are the details on LCD display patterns and function buttons.) F4 button while holding down the SHIFT button: Cpy2 Specifies the external recording device connected to COPY 2 for the playback media. F3 button: Text Displays text information of selected event on the recording event list. • Refer to the operating instructions of recorder for details on each function.) Notes: • The monitor display is not changed even if pressing the F1 button while the date-and-time entry form is displayed. Numeric buttons: Enters numeric parameters. CAM (SET) button: Determines the selected parameter or searching filter setting. press the MON (ESC) button.

6. To determine the filter setting. The searching filter window will appear on the active monitor.25. To select a desired camera channel. The LCD display becomes as follows.25.03*12:34:56 AM APR. repeat Step 5.03*12:34:56 AM APR.25.25.03*12:34:56 AM APR. F4 button: Copy The selected recording images will be copied to a external recording device (DVD or CD-R). Press the CAM (SET) button of main unit or top button of 3D joystick unit. To change the filter setting. 4.25.03*12:34:56 AM APR. do either of the following. 5.03*12:34:56 AM REC EVENT SEARCH 100 VMD 2. move the 3D joystick to right of left. F1 button while holding down the SHIFT button: Drive Record List of external recording device will be displayed.25.03*12:34:56 AM APR.03*12:34:56 AM APR.03*12:34:56 AM APR. The search list display will change as follows. 47 .25. Repeat pressing the SEARCH/T&D SEARCH button to display the recording event list window.03*12:34:56 AM APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM TIME&DATE SEARCH REC EVT MANUAL MANUAL MANUAL MANUAL MANUAL MANUAL MANUAL MANUAL Search Mode HD500 Edit Group Alm Copy F1 F2 F3 F4 APR. and the selected camera channels will be displayed on the window. the searching filter window will be closed.25. TIME&DATE CAMERA REC EVENT CAM 01ch 01ch 01ch 01ch 01ch 01ch 01ch 01ch TEXT UNLOCK FILTER TEXT ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP TOTAL SEARCH MARK LCD display TIME&DATE APR. Note: To change the filter settings of two or more camera channels.Example of searching filter display and settings 1.25. The associated recording event will be displayed on the monitor. TIME&DATE CAMERA REC EVENT CAM 01ch 01ch 01ch 01ch 01ch 01ch 01ch 01ch TEXT UNLOCK FILTER TEXT ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP TOTAL SEARCH MARK G Operation (WJ-HD500 Series) If you press the SEARCH/T&D SEARCH button.25. press the CAM (SET) button of main unit or top button of 3D joystick unit. The following are the details on LCD display patterns and function buttons.03*12:34:56 AM APR.03*12:34:56 AM APR.03*12:34:56 AM REC EVENT SEARCH 100 VMD Available buttons and functions 3. TIME&DATE APR.25. 1 9 2 10 3 11 4 12 5 13 6 14 7 15 8 16 SET : [ SET ] CANCEL : [ ESC ] Note: When you press the MON (ESC) button. • Press the + or – button.25. To select “CAMERA” for the searching filter.25.25.25. Record List → Thumbnail Display → Record List →… Note: To quit search playback.03*12:34:56 AM APR. Search Mode Drive F1 F2 F3 HD500 F4 Note: Refer to the operating instructions of recorder for details on each function.03*12:34:56 AM TIME&DATE SEARCH REC EVT MANUAL MANUAL MANUAL MANUAL MANUAL MANUAL MANUAL MANUAL APR.25. press the MON (ESC) or EXIT button. move the 3D joystick to right or left. F2 button: Group The selected group is switched by rotation. Live image will be displayed again on the monitor.03*12:34:56 AM APR. CAMERA FILTERING CAMERA F1 button: Edit You will press this button when editing the Search Editing Area on the Record List.25.03*12:34:56 AM APR. and other channels will be displayed in gray.03*12:34:56 AM APR. • Rotate the JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise. F3 button: Alm Only the Alarm and Emergency Record List will be displayed on the monitor.25. The selected camera channels will turn to blue.25.03*12:34:56 AM APR. the dateand-time entry form will appear on the monitor.03*12:34:56 AM APR.

48 . The associated record will be displayed on the Record List. • Rotate the shuttle ring clockwise or counterclockwise. After editing.Example of F1 button use 1. 4. • You will use no function buttons for controlling the recorder. 3. Notes: • To quit search playback. 03-05-07 20:30:00 TO SEARCH PUSH PLAY KEY DATE MAY29. Record List will be displayed on the active monitor. • Rotate the JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise.00 NO GROUP 010009 G2 010008 G1 010007 G3 010006 ALL 010005 ALL 010004 G4 010003 ALL 010002 G3 TIME 23:59:59 22:15:40 21:00:07 17:33:05 7:23:11 6:59:44 8:55:28 0:01:28 (TOTAL ALL GROUP REC-MODE T/L M/S ALM-TRM12 O/S ALM-VMD3 T/L T/L EMR M/S ALM-PC4 T/L MAN T/L ALM-TRM1 2343RECORD) SEARCH: MAY29. • Rotate the shuttle ring clockwise or counterclockwise. The specified playback image will be displayed on the monitor. PLAY:B ESC:FSTOP SEARCH:DISPLAY 2. Enter the desired date and time by performing either of the following. Press the PLAY/PAUSE button or CAM (SET) button.00 NO GROUP 010009 G2 010008 G1 010007 G3 010006 ALL 010005 ALL 010004 G4 010003 ALL 010002 G3 TIME 23:59:59 22:15:40 21:00:07 17:33:05 7:23:11 6:59:44 8:55:28 0:01:28 (TOTAL ALL GROUP REC-MODE T/L M/S ALM-TRM12 O/S ALM-VMD3 T/L T/L EMR M/S ALM-PC4 T/L MAN T/L ALM-TRM1 2343RECORD) LCD display Search Mode HD200 COPY DONE! LEFT:20% SEL:JOG Operating procedure 1.00 SEL:←→ CHG:+– 9:31 G1 EXE:SET ESC:FSTOP 6. (Refer to the operating instructions of recorder. • Press the + or – button.) 3. press the CAM (SET) button. • Press the + or – button. Move the cursor to a position to be edited by performing either of the following. Press the SEARCH/T&D SEARCH button. Press the SEARCH/T&D SEARCH button. DATE MAY29. The time & date search window will be displayed on the active monitor.00 NO GROUP 010009 G2 010008 G1 010007 G3 010006 ALL 010005 ALL 010004 G4 010003 ALL 010002 G3 TIME 23:59:59 22:15:40 21:00:07 17:33:05 7:23:11 6:59:44 8:55:28 0:01:28 (TOTAL ALL GROUP REC-MODE T/L M/S ALM-TRM12 O/S ALM-VMD3 T/L T/L EMR M/S ALM-PC4 T/L MAN T/L ALM-TRM1 2343RECORD) SEARCH: MAY29. Enter the desired date and time by performing either of the following. 5. • Move the 3D joystick controller to the right or left. Press the F1 button. • Rotate the JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise. Repeat Step 3 and 4 to edit Search Editing Area. • Move the 3D joystick controller to the right or left. • Image to be played back differs depending on recorders. Live image will be displayed again on the monitor. G Operation (WJ-HD200 Series) The following is the LCD display and operating procedure of search playback. DATE MAY29.00 SEL:←→ CHG:+– 0:01 G1 EXE:SET ESC:FSTOP Search Editing Area 2. press the MON (ESC) or EXIT button. Search Editing Area will appear on the Record List. 4. Move the cursor to a position to be edited by performing either of the following.

1.) I Other Available Functions Depending on recorders. Note: Image to be played back differ depending on recorders. Press the PLAY/PAUSE or CAM (SET) button again. 84) Mmm/DD/YYYY HH:MM 12 Mar/17/2004 12:00 AM Note: You can change the display pattern setting. Select a desired group to play back by rotating the JogDial. The LCD display will return to the normal status. 83) • Alarm search (WJ-HD200 Series / WJ-HD100 Series) (p. (Refer to p. 67) • Filtering ON/OFF (WJ-HD300 Series only) (p.I Time & Date Search Playback You can search playback images by entering a desired recording date and time. • Disk selection (WJ-HD300 Series only) (p. Press the PLAY/PAUSE or CAM (SET) button.) 2. (Refer to the operating instructions of recorder. • Move the 3D joystick controller to the right or left. Note: To cancel the entry. The image on the specified date and time will be played back on the active monitor. The image on the specified date and time will be played back on the active monitor. The time-and-date entry form will appear on the LCD. 3. 67) • A . When using WJ-HD500 Series Group selection is required after Step 3. "Group Select" menu will appear on the LCD. HD500 Index Search Group Select=All-G 2. 71 Time & Date Search Display Pattern.B repeat playback setting (WJ-HD300 Series only) (p. 68) • Displaying camera and playback image (WJ-HD500 Series only) (p. 4. • Press the numeric buttons. Press the PLAY/PAUSE or CAM (SET) button. the following functions are available. Mmm/DD/YYYY HH:MM 12 Mar/16/2004 01:32 PM 3. press the MON (ESC) or EXIT button. 1. Press the T & D SEARCH button while holding down the SHIFT button. • Rotate the shuttle ring clockwise or counterclockwise. the LCD will return to the default status. Enter the desired date and time by by performing either of the following. After the image has been played back. Move the cursor to a position to be edited by performing either of the following. 49 . • Rotate the JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise. 68) • Recorded-image copy (WJ-HD500 Series only) (p. Perform as follows.

p. • Pressing the FOCUS FAR will bring the focus farther from the object. iris reset has been assigned to the A button. p. 1.CAMERA CONTROL You can control cameras from this system controller. Move the 3D joystick to desired directions. auto focus has been assigned to the B button and top button.) 2. 42 Camera Selection. and desired camera. I Camera Panning/Tilting Control The following procedure is available when panning/tilting heads or combination cameras are connected to system units.) 2. (Refer to p. Adjust the lens focus by pressing the FOCUS NEAR and FAR buttons of 3D joystick unit. Note: As the factory default. Select a system unit. To adjust the lens focus automatically Zoom wheel controller Note: Available zooming rates differ depending on the motorized zoom lens.) 2. (Refer to p. Select a system unit. 42 Monitor Selection. • Turning the zoom wheel controller to the right will zoom the image. and p. and p. and desired camera. p. monitor. and desired camera. Move the zoom wheel controller (located at the top of 3D joystick). and top buttons). 42 Camera Selection.) 2. (The zooming level will go down. Adjust the lens iris by pressing the IRIS OPEN or CLOSE button of 3D joystick unit. B.) I Zooming Control The following procedure is available when a motorized zoom lens is attached to a camera. monitor. The selected camera will pan and tilt. 41 System Unit Selection. The lens iris will be adjusted automatically. I Lens Iris Control The following procedure is available when a selected camera has an adjustable lens iris. To reset the lens iris to the default status Press the A button of 3D joystick unit. and top buttons). • Pressing the FOCUS NEAR will bring the focus nearer to the object. 63 for assignment. and desired camera. monitor. you can pan and tilt the camera faster. and p. • Pressing the IRIS CLOSE will close the lens iris. monitor. Press the B button of main unit or top button of 3D joystick unit. 1. • Pressing the IRIS OPEN will open the lens iris. You can assign auto focus to the function buttons (F1 to F4/F5 to F8) or joystick function buttons (A. Select a system unit. 1. (Refer to p. The lens focus will be adjusted automatically for the object displayed when you pressed the button. 42 Monitor Selection. Note: As the factory default. 63 for assignment. 41 System Unit Selection. p. 1. (The zooming level will go up. (Refer to p. B. (Refer to p.) 50 . 42 Monitor Selection. (Refer to p. 41 System Unit Selection.) • Turning the controller to the left will widen the scene. 42 Monitor Selection. If you move the 3D joystick widely. 42 Camera Selection. and p. 42 Camera Selection. You can assign iris reset to the function buttons (F1 to F4/F5 to F8) or joystick function buttons (A. Note: Panning/tilting speed differs depending on cameras. Select a system unit.) WIDE TELE I Lens Focus Control The following procedure is available when a selected camera has a lens whose focus is adjustable. 41 System Unit Selection.

(Refer to the operating instructions of combination camera. (Refer to p. 1. 41 System Unit Selection. you need to register the home position of combination camera.I Preset Position Control Preset position is the function to register camera monitoring positions (preset positions) associated with position numbers. you need to register the preset positions of combination camera.) 2. 42 Monitor Selection. Select a desired combination camera. and top buttons). 2. You can move the camera to the home position only by pressing the PRESET/PGM PRESET button. (Refer to p. The preset position will be registered. and p.) 2. Press the PRESET/PGM PRESET button. monitor. By entering the position numbers. Select a system unit. monitor. 42 Camera Selection. Press the PRESET/PGM PRESET button. and the home position image will be displayed on an active monitor. Enter a camera function number by pressing the numeric buttons. you can recall the camera functions by pressing these buttons. I Camera Function Control You can recall the camera functions of combination cameras by entering the function number from this system controller. The entered number will appear on the LCD. and then the PRESET/PGM PRESET button. and desired camera. 1. 42 Monitor Selection.) 1. Mon02 Cam001 F1 F2 F3 ____3 F4 3. Refer to p. The entered number will appear on the LCD. 42 Camera Selection. Note: You can also move the camera to the home position by pressing the button 0. Select a system unit. Note: To activate this function. p. 57 MENU FUNCTION DESCRIPTIONS for details. you can move cameras to the preset positions. (Refer to p. Move the camera to a desired position by moving the 3D joystick. Enter a preset position number by pressing the numeric buttons. and p. Press the PRESET/PGM PRESET button while holding down the SHIFT button. I Home Position Control Home position is the default preset position. and desired camera. Enter a preset position number you wish to register by pressing the numeric buttons. 41 System Unit Selection. 3. Note: To activate this function. The camera will move to the registered home position. The camera will move to the registered preset position. and the preset position image will be displayed on an active monitor. Press the CAM FUNC/SYS FUNC button. p. Mon02 Cam001 Pre003 F1 F2 F3 F4 To register preset positions 1. (Example: When the selected camera does not support preset position control) Mon01 Cam001 Pre012 Invalid 51 . B. 42 Camera Selection. Refer to the operating instructions of combination camera for the association of camera numbers and functions. and “Memory” will appear on the LCD. The associated camera function will be activated. Mon01 Cam001 F1 F2 F3 ___12 F4 Mon01 Cam001 F1 F2 F3 ____3 F4 3. “Invalid” will appear on the LCD. Mon01 Cam001 Memory Pre012 Note: If the registration have failed.) 2. The entered number will appear on the LCD. Note: If you assign camera functions to the joystick function buttons (A.

(Refer to p. and the camera position image will be displayed on the active monitor. preset positions and camera positions need to be registered. 42 Camera Selection. Mon02 Cam128 F1 F2 F3 HD316 F4 Mon02 Cam003 F1 F2 F3 HD316 F4 Mon02 Cam001 F1 F2 F3 HD316 F4 Mon01 Cam001 F1 F2 F3 ___11 F4 2. p. the memorized camera operations will be cleared. Press the CAM POSI button.) 1. (Refer to p. To return to the camera image more recently selected. repeat pressing the + button while holding down the HISTORY button. The camera image formerly selected will be displayed on an active monitor. 41 System Unit Selection and p. you can track back the camera images formerly displayed. 52 . Select a system unit. Note: To activate this function. The camera image more recently selected will be displayed on the monitor. Enter a camera position number by pressing the numeric buttons. press the + button while holding down the HISTORY button. and p. 41 System Unit Selection. You can recall these operations in order or reverse order. this system controller memorizes up to 10 steps of camera selection. 51 To register preset positions and p. The entered number will appear on the LCD. 1. and you can move a desired camera to a desired preset position only by entering a camera position number. 42 Monitor Selection. (Refer to p.) 2. 42 Monitor Selection.) 2. 76 Camera Position Registration or Clearing. (Camera 128 → 3) Note: To recall camera images more formerly selected one by one. Camera 1 → 3 → 128 has been selected. (You can recall up to 10 camera images. In the following procedure.I Camera Position Control Camera position is the association of camera numbers and preset position numbers. In the following example. Press the – button while holding down the HISTORY button. The registered camera and preset position will be selected. The wiper will be activated while this button is being pressed. I Wiper Control The following procedure is available when a selected camera (housing) is equipped with a wiper. repeat pressing the – button while holding down the HISTORY button. Mon02 Cam001 F1 F2 F3 HD316 F4 Mon01 C-P011 F1 F2 F3 HD316 F4 Mon02 Cam003 F1 F2 F3 HD316 F4 I Camera Selection Recall Every time you select a camera or camera position. Select a system unit and monitor. (Camera 1 → 3 → 128) 3. Note: After power-off or system unit selection. Keep pressing the WIPER button. and desired camera.) Mon02 Cam128 F1 F2 F3 HD316 F4 Note: To return to the camera images more recently selected one by one. Up to 1 000 camera positions are registrable in the system. monitor. 1.

41 System Unit Selection.) 2. (Refer to p. 81) • Camera sequence (p. 82) • Iris reset (p. I Other Functions You can control the following functions by pressing the function buttons (F1 to F8). G Operating Procedure (Momentary mode) 1. 65 MENU FUNCTION DETAILS. p. associated by the installation wiring. Select a system unit. press the DEF ON/OFF button while holding down the SHIFT button. monitor. 70) • Camera function (p. 42 Camera Selection. and desired camera. 81) • Camera sort (p. The following procedure is available when an auxiliary control device. Keep pressing the AUX 1 ON/OFF or AUX 2 ON/OFF button. 42 Monitor Selection. Note: The operation procedure differs depending on the mode setting (=latch or momentary mode) of auxiliary control device. press the AUX 1 ON/OFF or AUX 2 ON/OFF button while holding down the SHIFT button.) 2. • Camera setup (p. 42 Monitor Selection. 42 Monitor Selection. will be activated. 82) • Camera +1 (p. p. 81) • Home position (p. Note: The defroster will be automatically deactivated after the specified time. 3. and p. and camera an auxiliary control device is connected to. monitor. 53 . 1. The auxiliary control device.) 2. Press the DEF ON/OFF button. 41 System Unit Selection. and p. monitor. 65 • BW mode (p. 67) • Camera cleaning (p. 66) • Auto pan setup and activation (p. 80) • Auto pan (p.I Defroster Control The following procedure is available when a selected camera (housing) is equipped with a defroster. associated by the installation wiring. p. is connected to a system unit. 3. such as Receiver WV-RC150. To deactivate the defroster. The auxiliary control device. (Refer to p. 66) • Patrol Learn (p. Press the AUX 1 ON/OFF or AUX 2 ON/OFF button. The defroster will be activated. 83) I Auxiliary Control You can control one or two auxiliary control devices. 65) • Auto mode (p. 82) • Auto focus (p. 42 Camera Selection. (Refer to p. and camera an auxiliary control device is connected to. 42 Camera Selection. Select a system unit. To quit the auxiliary control. will be activated while this button is being pressed. Refer to p. 41 System Unit Selection. Select a system unit. 81) • Patrol play (p. and p. 82) • Camera –1 (p. G Operating Procedure (Latch mode) 1.

-“. I Alarm Suspension You can temporarily stop alarm inputs to all the system units in the following procedure. I Alarm Reset You can cancel the alarm mode (“Alarm” sign is blinking. (Available for WJ-HD500 or WJHD200 Series) JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise: • Moves the cursor. and the camera number is displayed as “. • Moves the cursor. Then. “Alarm Recall” sign will appear on the LCD. 1.). Perform operations while watching the active monitor.) or alarm auto reset mode (The ALARM indicator is lighting. Refer to pp. Note: WJ-HD300 Series does not support alarm history search. 2. Alarm Recall 2. The alarm mode or alarm auto reset mode of all the system units will be cancelled. press ALARM/ALM SUSPEND button again while holding down the SHIFT button. (Available for WJ-HD500 or WJHD200 Series) Shuttle ring counterclockwise: • Moves to the previous page. Note: You cannot suspend each alarm input one by one. Press ALM RESET/ALM ALL RESET button. (Available for WJHD500 or WJ-HD200 Series) + button: Increases a numeric value. During the alarm mode. G How to Display Alarm History Tables 1. Refer to the operating instructions of system units. this system controller is notified that an alarm has been activated.ALARM CONTROL I System Controller Behavior during the Alarm Mode When an alarm signal is input to cameras or system units. The alarm inputs to all the system units will be suspended all together. • You cannot cancel the alarm mode or alarm auto reset mode of each system unit one by one. and the ALARM indicator will go out. CAM (SET) button: Determines the selected parameter.. The following procedure is available when the selected system unit can display the alarm history table. I Alarm History Search To play back a desired alarm image. The alarm suspension mode will be canceled. “Alarm” sign will blink on the LCD. “Alarm” sign changes from blinking to steady light. The alarm inputs to all the system units will be reset all together. – button: Decreases a numeric value. • Moves the cursor. the ALARM indicator will blink. 55 to 56. Press the ALARM/ALM SUSPEND button while holding down the SHIFT button. Note: The operation details differ depending on recorders. Controls commonly available <Main unit> Shuttle ring clockwise: • Moves to the next page. and the ALM SUSPEND indicator will go out. The alarm inputs will be suspended and the ALM SUSPEND indicator will light up. Mon01 Cam--Alarm HD316 When an alarm is automatically canceled (=alarm auto reset mode). Notes: • Alarm behaviors differ depending on connected system units. • Changes the selected parameter. Numeric buttons: Enters numeric parameters. and the alarm history table will be displayed on an active monitor. 54 . and the LCD display returns to the normal status. the alarm history table of selected system unit can be displayed. Press the ALM RECALL button. To cancel the alarm suspension mode. MON (ESC) or EXIT button: Closes the search list display.

F2 button: Group The selected group is switched by rotation. Note: Refer to the operating instructions of recorder for details on each function. EXIT. Repeat Step 3 and 4 to edit Search Editing Area. The following are the details on LCD display patterns and function buttons of WJ-HD500. WJ-HD300. 3D joystick downward (M): Moves the cursor down. • Rotate the shuttle ring clockwise or counterclockwise. Example of F1 button use 1. Search Editing Area will appear on the Record List. • Press the + or – button.<Joystick unit> 3D joystick upward (L): Moves the cursor up.00 ALL GROUP NO GROUP TIME REC-MODE 010008 G1 22:15:40 M/S ALM-TRM12 21:00:07 O/S ALM-VMD3 010007 G3 7:23:11 T/L EMR 010005 ALL 010004 G4 6:59:44 M/S ALM-PC4 0:01:28 T/L ALM-TRM1 010002 G3 (TOTAL 2343RECORD) PLAY:B ESC:FSTOP SEARCH:DISPLAY SEL:JOG 55 . Note: Depending on recorder types. 3D joystick to the right (s): Moves the cursor to the right. 4. 5. Enter the desired date and time by performing either of the following. or MON (ESC) button. • Rotate the JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise. • Move the 3D joystick controller to the right or left. 7. The associated record will be displayed on the Record List. Press the F1 button. Zoom wheel controller to the right or left: Changes the search list display. HD500 Copy F4 Available buttons and functions F1 button: Edit You will press this button when editing the Search Editing Area on the Record List. and WJ-HD100 Series recorders. press the ALM RECALL. Record list ↔ Thumbnail Display ↔ Record List …) Top button: Determines the selected parameter. you can press the function buttons (F1 to F8) to activate the search function. Move the cursor to a position to be edited by performing either of the following.00 SEL:←→ CHG:+– 9:31 ALL GROUP EXE:SET ESC:FSTOP 6.) DATE MAY29. (Refer to Step 1 in p.00 ALL GROUP NO GROUP TIME REC-MODE 010008 G1 22:15:40 M/S ALM-TRM12 21:00:07 O/S ALM-VMD3 010007 G3 7:23:11 T/L EMR 010005 ALL 010004 G4 6:59:44 M/S ALM-PC4 0:01:28 T/L ALM-TRM1 010002 G3 (TOTAL 2343RECORD) SEARCH: MAY29. press the CAM (SET) button. F4 button: Copy The selected recording images will be copied to a external recording device (DVD or CD-R). 54 How to Display Alarm History Tables.00 ALL GROUP NO GROUP TIME REC-MODE 010008 G1 22:15:40 M/S ALM-TRM12 21:00:07 O/S ALM-VMD3 010007 G3 7:23:11 T/L EMR 010005 ALL 010004 G4 6:59:44 M/S ALM-PC4 0:01:28 T/L ALM-TRM1 010002 G3 (TOTAL 2343RECORD) SEARCH: MAY29. (For example. To close the Alarm and Emergency Record List .00 SEL:←→ CHG:+– 0:01 G1 EXE:SET ESC:FSTOP Search Editing Area G Operation (WJ-HD500 Series) Alarm Recall Edit Group F1 F2 F3 3. DATE MAY29. Display the Alarm and Emergency Record List on the active monitor. 3D joystick to the left (t): Moves the cursor to the left. 2. After editing. DATE MAY29.

00 00:00:00 JUN 1. • Rotate the JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise.03 12:00 Search Editing Area 3. DATE TIME ALM 2000 JUN14 20:30:00 T1 1999 JUN14 15:30:12 T3 1998 JUN14 12:15:04 T4 1997 JUN14 12:15:02 V8 1996 JUN14 10:07:05 V2 1995 JUN14 10:07:04 T2 1994 JUN14 10:06:55 T6 1993 JUN14 09:58:32 V5 (TOTAL 2000EVENTS) TO SEARCH PUSH T&D KEY 1. or MON (ESC) button. ALARM RECALL YEAR03 NO. Notes: • You will use no function buttons for controlling the recorder. • Rotate the JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise. Press the ALM RECALL button. • Press the + or – button.G Operation (WJ-HD200 Series) Alarm Recall Edit F1 F2 F3 • Rotate the shuttle ring clockwise or counterclockwise. To close the ALARM RECALL window. Repeat Step 3 and 4 to edit Search Editing Area. ALARM RECALL YEAR03 NO.00 16:06:34 10 ALM * T T * V V * T * T T V * T * V 2.00 02:00:20 MAY14.00 02:34:56 JUN 1.00 23:00:59 APR14.00 01:10:01 MAY31.00 22:05:50 APR14. HD200 F4 Note: WJ-HD200 Ver. (Refer to the operating instructions of recorder. • Move the 3D joystick controller to the right or left. 5. 7. press the ALM RECALL. DATE TIME ALM 2000 JUN14 20:30:00 T1 1999 JUN14 15:30:12 T3 1998 JUN14 12:15:04 T4 1997 JUN14 12:15:02 V8 1996 JUN14 10:07:05 V2 1995 JUN14 10:07:04 T2 1994 JUN14 10:06:55 T6 1993 JUN14 09:58:32 V5 (TOTAL 2000EVENTS) SEARCH JUN14. • Image to be played back differs depending on recorders. 1. 2. Search Editing Area will appear on the ALARM RECALL window.00 23:00:59 MAY 6. (Refer to the operating instructions of recorder. or MON (ESC) button. The specified playback image will be displayed on the monitor. To close the ALARM RECALL window. Move the cursor to a position to be edited by performing either of the following. • Press the + or – button. Note: Refer to the operating instructions of recorder for details.) 6. Move the cursor to a position to be edited by performing either of the following. The ALARM RECALL window will be displayed on the active monitor. • Move the 3D joystick controller to the right or left. 4. Press the CAM (SET) button. 5. press the ALM RECALL. The ALARM RECALL window will be displayed on the active monitor. Enter the desired date and time by performing either of the following. Press the ALM RECALL button.24 later or WJ-HD220 supports alarm history search. The specified playback image will be displayed on the monitor. Enter the desired date and time by performing either of the following. Press the F1 button. 3. EXIT.00 05:30:31 MAY 7.) 56 . G Operation (WJ-HD100 Series) Alarm Recall HD100 Example of F1 button use 1. • Rotate the JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise. EXIT. 4. Available buttons and functions F1 button: Edit You will press this button when editing the Search Editing Area on the ALARM RECALL window.00 23:34:45 MAY30. NO 99 98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 ALARM RECALL 1 OF DATE TIME JUN 9. Press the CAM (SET) button.

I Menu Flow When you press the MENU button during normal operation. you can recall the assigned button functions and joystick functions. recorder functions. (=Joystick button function) Only by pressing an associated button. you can also assign the menu functions to the A. 58 Menu Function Categories. B and top buttons of 3D joystick unit. Note: For details. (=Button function) In addition. refer to p. and system functions.) Normal status Mon04 Cam128 F1 F2 F3 MENU HD316 F4 • EXIT or MON (ESC) • 60 seconds after the operation is discontinued MENU MENU MENU MENU Camera Functions (CAM) LCD MENU CAM 101 Camera Setup SHIFT or Recorder Functions (HDD) LCD MENU HDD 201 HD300 DiskSelect MENU or System Functions (SYS) LCD MENU SYS 301 System Setup MENU or Controller Functions (CNT) LCD MENU CNT 401 Camera Cleaning or Joystick Functions (J/S MENU) J/S MENU Camera Function 501 MENU SHIFT SHIFT MENU SHIFT + or LCD MENU Auto Mode CAM 102 LCD MENU HDD 202 HD300 A-B Repeat + or LCD MENU SYS 302 Switcher OSD + or LCD MENU CNT 402 Time&Date Type + or J/S MENU System Function 502 LCD MENU BW Mode CAM 103 LCD MENU HDD 203 HD300 Listed LCD MENU VLD History SYS 303 LCD MENU Auto Login CNT 403 J/S MENU Auto Pan 503 • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • MENU or SHIFT MENU + or 57 .) (Refer to p.) to the F1 to F8 button of system controller.MENU FUNCTION DESCRIPTIONS You can assign frequently-used menu functions (system functions and camera functions. menu functions are displayed on the LCD. etc. 63 To Assign Menu Functions to Joystick Function Buttons. The menu functions are classified according to the function types (camera functions. etc. 63 To Assign Menu Functions to Function Buttons or p.

or temporarily cancel the searching filter of WJ-HD300 Series. Auto Pan Setup LCD MENU CAM 105 Auto Pan Setup You will perform the auto pan setting of camera. LCD MENU Auto Mode You will select and activate one of the auto mode functions of camera: sequence. Note: Refer to the operating instructions of camera for details on the auto pan function. sort. G Recorder Functions (HDD) HD300 Disk Select (WJ-HD300 Series only) Auto Mode LCD MENU HDD 201 HD300 DiskSelect CAM 102 You will select the built-in hard disk or an external recording devices for playback by WJ-HD300 Series. recover. and AUTO 2. • You will change camera settings. Select a desired function for assignment or operation. HD300 Listed (WJ-HD300 Series only) LCD MENU HDD 203 HD300 Listed You will cancel. Note: Refer to the operating instructions of camera for details on the BW mode. AUTO 1. 58 . Patrol Learn LCD MENU CAM 104 Patrol Learn You will perform the patrol learn setting of camera.I Menu Function Categories Menu functions are classified in the following categories. LCD MENU BW Mode You will select and activate one of the color modes: MANUAL ON. MANUAL OFF. G Camera Functions (CAM) Camera Setup LCD MENU CAM 101 Camera Setup • This function displays or closes the camera setup menu for system settings. • You will cancel A – B repeat playback of WJ-HD300 Series. HD300 A-B Repeat (WJ-HD300 Series only) BW Mode LCD MENU HDD 202 HD300 A—B Repeat CAM 103 • You will set the start and end points of A – B repeat playback of WJ-HD300 Series. auto pan and patrol. HD500 V-Multi (WJ-HD500 Series only) LCD MENU HDD 204 HD500 V—Multi You will select a playback picture to display on the upper left segment of the multiscreen monitor displaying live images.

Displays the VIDEO LOSS HISTORY table on monitors connected to the matrix switcher. VLD History (WJ-SX150 Series only) Operator Setup LCD MENU VLD History SYS 303 LCD MENU CNT 404 Operator Setup • You will register a new operator. Time & Date Type LCD MENU SYS 301 System Setup You will open the setup menu of system unit and change the settings. LCD MENU CNT 403 Auto Login/out You will set operators who can log into the system automatically. • You will change parameters of registered operators. LCD MENU Mux Still SYS 305 Cam Posi Map You can activate either still or moving mode for display on the multiscreen monitor. LCD MENU CNT 402 Time&Date Type You will set the time and date display pattern of time-anddate entry form. Camera Level Mux Still (Available if Video Multiplexer WJFS416 or Multiplexer Board WJ-SXB151 is Used in the System) LCD MENU CNT 406 Camera Level You will change the camera control levels of operators. Switcher OSD (WJ-SX150 Series only) Auto Login/Logout LCD MENU SYS 302 Switcher OSD Displays or hides the OSD items displayed on monitors connected to the matrix switcher. G Controller Camera Cleaning LCD MENU CNT 407 Cam Posi Map You will register camera positions (the association of camera numbers and preset position numbers). You can activate either VCR playback or camera picture display on an active monitor.G System Functions (SYS) System Setup You will select the first and last camera channel to perform camera cleaning. Mux VCR/CAM (Available if Video Multiplexer WJ-FS416 or Multiplexer Board WJ-SXB151 is Used in the System) Function Level LCD MENU Mux VCR/CAM SYS 304 LCD MENU CNT 405 Function Level You will change the function levels of operators. LCD MENU CNT 401 Camera Cleaning 59 .

J/S MENU Camera Sequence 504 The camera sequence function of selected camera will be activated. LCD Title Patrol Play LCD MENU LCD Title CNT 410 J/S MENU Patrol Play 506 The patrol function of selected camera will be activated. 60 . which are displayed on the LCD. You will edit the function names of F1 to F8. J/S MENU Camera Function A camera function will be activated. Iris Reset Auto Pan J/S MENU Iris Reset 503 509 J/S MENU Auto Pan The lens iris of selected camera will be automatically reset to the factory default. HDD-Unit Map Camera Sort LCD MENU CNT 409 HDD-Unit Map You will register HDD-unit maps (the association of recorder numbers and unit numbers). J/S MENU Camera Sort 505 The camera sort function of selected camera will be activated. 501 Auto Focus J/S MENU Auto Focus 508 System Function J/S MENU System Function A system function will be activated. 502 The “Auto Focus” function of selected camera will be activated.Cam-Unit Map Camera Sequence LCD MENU CNT 408 Cam-Unit Map You will register cam-unit maps (the association of camera numbers and unit numbers). Home Position G Joystick Button Functions (J/S MENU) Camera Function J/S MENU Home Position 507 The selected camera will move to the home position. The auto pan function of selected camera will be activated.

2. I To Recall Menu Functions You can recall menu functions as follows. Select a system unit for which you wish to recall a function. p. 41 Recorder Selection. 1. Note: Available multiscreen segment patterns differ depending on system units. LCD MENU CAM 101 Camera Setup 3. 42 Monitor Selection. Refer to the operating instructions of system units.) HD500 Copy (WJ-HD500 Series Only) J/S MENU HD500 Copy 513 Recorded images will be copied from the built-in hard disk of recorder to external recording devices. go to Step 4. (Refer to p. • You will cancel A – B repeat playback of WJ-HD300 Series. enter a function number. Select a category (q) by rotating the shuttle ring. Camera –1 519 J/S MENU Camera -1 511 J/S MENU Multi 16-Seg 520 The image of camera with the lower channel number will be displayed.Camera +1 J/S MENU Camera +1 510 J/S MENU Multi 9-Seg J/S MENU Multi 10-Seg J/S MENU Multi 13-Seg 517 518 The image of camera with the higher channel number will be displayed. Then. or p. and press the MENU button. J/S MENU 514 HD200 Alm Search The alarm search function of recorder will be activated. Then. Press the MENU button. p. 61 . 42 Camera Selection. HD300 A-B Repeat (WJ-HD300 Series Only) J/S MENU 512 HD300 A—B Repeat • You will set the start and end points of A – B repeat playback of WJ-HD300 Series. Select a desired function. “Camera Setup” main menu will appear on the LCD. Mon01 Cam016 F1 F2 F3 HD316 F4 HD200 Alarm Search (WJ-HD200 Series Only) Note: You can skip Step 2 and 3 if you know what function to recall. The screen of monitor connected to the selected system unit will be divided in multiscreen segments. Multiscreen Display J/S MENU Multi 4-Seg J/S MENU Multi 7-Seg 515 516 LCD MENU SYS 301 System Setup Note: Refer to pp. 58 to 61 for selectable functions. 41 System Unit Selection. select a function number (w) by rotating the JogDial. In this case.

press the EXIT or MON (ESC) button. Patrol Learn Start Stop F5 (SHIFT + F1): System Setup F4 LCD MENU SYS 301 System Setup 7. The operating procedure differs depending on each function. HD300 Listed On Off F8 (SHIFT + F4): HD300 Disk Select F7 HD300 DiskSelect F8 Nr-A Cp–A Cpy1 Cpy2 A: Iris Reset Iris Reset F1: Camera Setup A Camera Setup F1 On Off Rst A. Perform the operations to activate the selected function. and top) buttons. Note: To change the default assignments. press the EXIT or MON (ESC) button again. To exit the main menu. The LCD display will return to the default status. The LCD display will return to the main menu. 65 to p. refer to p.4. To exit the sub menu. B. The sub menu of selected function will appear on the LCD. To Assign Menu Functions to Joystick Function Buttons. 63.Rst F2: Auto Mode B: Auto Focus Auto Focus B Auto Mode F2 Seq Sort Pan Patrol Top: Auto Focus Auto Focus J/S 62 . 6. Press the ENTER or CAM (SET) button. System Setup On Off F5 F6 (SHIFT + F2): HD300 A – B Repeat Mon01 Cam016 F1 F2 F3 HD316 F4 HD300 A—B Repeat F6 Start End Cancel F7 (SHIFT + F3): HD300 Listed I Factory Default Setting of Button Functions and Joystick Button Functions The following functions have been assigned to the function (F1 to F8) buttons and joystick function (A. 63 To Assign Menu Functions to Function Buttons or p. 84. F3: BW Mode System Setup On Off 301 BW Mode F3 On Off Auto1 Auto2 F4: Patrol Learn 5. Refer to pp.

Select a desired function. 80 to 84 for each function. Press the MENU button. • Refer to the operating instruction of system unit for details on system function. B. To exit the menu. Enter a desired camera or system function number with the numeric buttons. press one of the F1 to F4 buttons for two seconds while holding down the SHIFT button. (Refer to p. The LCD will return to the normal display. 3. as shown in the illustration. 2.) 1. Press the function button you wish to assign the function for two seconds. Notes: • To assign menu functions to F5 to F8 buttons. 65 to 84. Mux Still Assign F2 305 Camera Function 501 Assign A Code= 1 Note: The illustration is an example in which “Camera Function Code = 1” has been assigned to the A button. Perform Step 1 to 3 in To Assign Menu Functions to Function Buttons. In this case. LCD MENU SYS 301 System Setup 3. LCD MENU CAM 101 Camera Setup 2. Note: Skip the next step when assigning neither “Camera Function” nor “System Function”. Select a desired category by rotating the shuttle ring. To exit the menu. 4. 63 . Select a function name by rotating the JogDial. I To Assign Menu Functions to Joystick Function Buttons Joystick button functions are assignable to the A. LCD MENU Mux Still SYS 305 • You can skip Step 2 if you know what function to recall. enter a function number. 65 to 84 for each function. • Refer to the operating instruction of camera for details on camera function. • The setting procedure differs depending on each function. J/S MENU ____1 Camera Function Notes: • The illustration is an example in which Camera Function Number 1 is pressed. (Refer to pp. and the message will appear for a few seconds.I To Assign Menu Functions to Function Buttons All menu functions are assignable to the function (F1 to F8) buttons. B or top button for two seconds. “Camera Setup” main menu will appear on the LCD. Refer to pp. • “Assign” message will appear for a few seconds. press the EXIT or MON (ESC) button. Press the A. The LCD display will return to the default status. or top button on the 3D joystick unit. The entered number will appear on the LCD for a few seconds. The function will be assigned to the button.) 1. • The menu function will be assigned to the button you pressed. and press the ENTER button. press the EXIT or MON (ESC) button. 4. 5.

The operating procedure differs depending on each function. To check other (joystick) button functions. Note: To cancel the function. and top) buttons. I To Check Button Functions and Joystick Button Functions You can check the functions assigned to the function (F1 to F8) buttons and joystick function (A. The LCD display will return to the normal status. rotate the JogDial. 1. press the function button while holding down the SHIFT button. press the EXIT or MON (ESC) button.Rst Note: To recall a function assigned to the F5 to F8 button. The button functions and joystick button function will appear on the LCD in the following order. Mon02 Cam128 F1 F2 F3 HD316 F4 Function Check Camera Setup F1 101 Note: This illustration is an example in which “Camera Setup” is assigned to the F1 button. 65 to 84. press the EXIT or MON (ESC) button. B. To finish checking the function. Press the MENU button while holding down the SHIFT button. Refer to pp. 2. Function Check Camera Setup F1 101 • • Function Check System Setup F8 301 Function Check Cam Func "4096" A 501 Function Check Sys Func "999" B 502 Function Check Auto Focus J/S 506 Function Check Camera Setup F1 101 • • 3.I To Recall Button Functions and Joystick Button Functions You can recall the assigned button functions and joystick button functions as follows. B. 64 . and top buttons). The LCD will return to the normal status. Camera Setup F1 On Off Rst A. 1. Perform the operations to activate the function. Press one of the function buttons (F1 to F4/F5 to F8) or one of the joystick function buttons (A. 2. The sub menu of recalled function will appear on the LCD. The F1 button function will appear on the LCD.

press this button. F4: Patrol Activates the patrol mode. 1 . • Moves the cursor to the left. 1. and “s” mark will light up beside “On”.) <Joystick unit> 3D joystick upward (L): Moves the cursor up. Press the F1 button. press this button. Press the F2 button. B button: Auto focus 4. (Refer to Step 1 to 4 of p. Note: Refer to the operating instructions of camera for details on auto mode. • Moves the cursor to the right. Perform the camera setting while watching the setup menu on the monitor. CAM (SET) button: Determines the selected parameter and moves to the sub menu. • To restore the default camera position. The setup menu of selected camera will be closed. F3: Pan Activates the auto pan mode.Display “Camera Setup” sub menu. auto pan. Refer to the operating instructions of camera. + button: Increases a numeric value. Camera Setup 101 On Off Rst A. 61 To Recall Menu Functions. 3D joystick + SHIFT button: Panning/tilting control Top button: Determines the selected parameter and moves to the sub menu. 2.MENU FUNCTION DETAILS I Camera Functions G Camera Setup You can display the setup menu of selected camera on the active monitor. Note: The details on the setup menu differ depending on camera models. – button: Decreases a numeric value. Display “Auto Mode” sub menu. auto sort. Then. 3D joystick to the right (s): • Increases a numeric value. Auto Mode 102 Seq Sort Pan Patrol F1 F2 F3 F4 Available controls and functions <Main unit> JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise: Changes the selected parameter. F4 button: To reset all the camera settings to the factory default. and camera patrol) for the selected camera.Rst F1 F2 F3 F4 3. You can activate an auto mode (auto sequence. and “s” mark will go out. F3 button: • Displays the special menu. MON (ESC) or EXIT button: Returns to the upper menu. 61 To Recall Menu Functions. 65 . Available buttons and functions F1: Seq Activates the sequence mode.) Camera Setup 101 On Off Rst A. Note: Auto mode will be canceled when you pan or tilt the selected camera by moving the 3D joystick. The setup menu of selected camera will appear on the active monitor. 3D joystick downward (M): Moves the cursor down. Auto mode will be activated. 3D joystick to the left (t): • Decreases a numeric value.Rst F1 F2 F3 F4 G Auto Mode 2. move the cursor to CAMERA RESET on the camera setup menu by moving the 3D joystick. move the cursor to REFRESH on the camera setup menu by moving the 3D joystick. F2: Sort Activates the sort mode. Select a desired function by pressing one of the F1 to F4 buttons. (Refer to Step 1 to 4 of p. Then.

66 . “Pre=nn” (nn is a number. This setting is applicable when using a near-infrared light source in a dark place. • If the available parameters for selected camera are ON. This function is activated to improve the camera sensitivity when monitoring a dark place. 1. Enter a preset position number. To activate preset positions during the patrol learn To move the camera to a preset position during the patrol learn. The patrol learn setup will start. press the CLEAR button. Display “Patrol Learn” sub menu. 4. 61 To Recall Menu Functions. 2. the patrol learn setup will automatically stop. The entered number will appear on the LCD.) G Patrol Learn You will perform the patrol learn setup. To quit the patrol learn setup. (The camera selects black and white mode if the picture is dark. BW mode will be activated. 61 To Recall Menu Functions.) will blink on the LCD. and the camera will move to the preset position. OFF. • Panning/Tilting (3D joystick) • Iris control (IRIS OPEN/CLOSE buttons) • Focus control (FOCUS FAR/NEAR buttons) • Zoom control (Zoom wheel controller) • Preset position Note: The available total time of patrol learn differs depending on cameras. and AUTO. Press the F1 button. 1. (Refer to Step 1 to 4 of p. Note: Refer to the operating instructions of camera for details on auto mode. If an object is continuously moving or has the same color as the background.) F4: Auto2 Activates Auto 2 mode. The color mode is recovered for the camera image. Patrol Learn Start Stop F1 F2 F3 ____3 F4 To recover the color mode Press the F2 button. 1. F2: Off Changes the camera image from black and white to color . Available buttons and functions F1: On Changes the camera image from color to black and white. press the F2 button. When activating Auto 2 mode. make sure the wavelength of light source is 800 nm or more. The following controls are available for patrol learn. Perform desired camera operations by moving the 3D joystick or zoom wheel controller. the object may not be properly recognized.) Patrol Learn Start Stop F1 F2 F3 104 F4 BW Mode 103 On Off Auto1 Auto2 F1 F2 F3 F4 2. Display “BW Mode” sub menu.G BW Mode You can change the color mode of camera images from color to black and white. Press one of the F1 to F4 buttons. etc. you can activate AUTO by pressing the F3 button. Press the PRESET/PGM PRESET button.) Notes: • The camera detects light source based on the information the CCD image pickup element receives. Note: To cancel the entry. (Refer to Step 1 to 4 of p. (The camera detects the light source type to prevent malfunction. or color mode if the picture is bright enough. Note: Refer to the operating instructions of camera for details on patrol learn. you will perform the following operations after Step 2 of Patrol Learn. 3. 2. F3: Auto1 Activates Auto 1 mode. When the time is over.

) Auto Pan Setup 105 Play Rvrs Start End F1 F2 F3 F4 2. 45 Search Playback. Available buttons and functions F1: Nr-A Specifies the normal or event recording area for playback. 2. 61 To Recall Menu Functions. the auto pan range will be reversed. Press the F3 button. move the camera to a point you wish to start auto pan.) F4: Cpy2 Specifies the external recording device connected to COPY 2 for the playback media.B Repeat” sub menu. (This button is available for WJ-HD316A and WJ-HD309. By moving the 3D joystick. Display “HD300 DiskSelect” sub menu. and “Search Mode” menu will appear on the LCD. G Auto Pan Setup and Activation You will set up and activate the auto pan function. perform the search playback operation. Notes: • If you press the F2 button.Patrol Learn Start Stop F1 F2 F3 Pre003 F4 1. • Auto pan will be canceled when you pan or tilt the selected camera by moving the 3D joystick.) HD300 DiskSelect 201 Nr-A Cp-A Cpy1 Cpy2 F1 F2 F3 F4 Note: After the camera has moved to the preset position. 4. 5. Display “HD300 A. Note: To cancel the start point. 3. 61 To Recall Menu Functions. The auto pan will be activated. move the camera to a point you wish to end auto pan. press the F4 button. The start point of auto pan will be set. Press one of the F1 to F4 buttons. (Refer to Step 1 to 4 of p. F3: Cpy1 Specifies the external recording device connected to COPY 1 for the playback media. The playback start point (A) will be set. G A-B Repeat Playback Setting (WJ-HD300 Series Only) You can playback the recorded images repeatedly by specifying the start point (A) and end point (B). the search list display will appear on the active monitor. and then activate the auto pan. The specified disk will be selected.) To set the start and end point of auto pan 1. (This button is available for WJ-HD316A and WJ-HD309. F2: Cp-A Specifies the copy area for playback. 2. 61 To Recall Menu Functions. “Pre-nn” will go out. 67 .) HD300 A—B Repeat 202 Start End Cancel F1 F2 F3 F4 I Recorder Functions G Disk Selection (WJ-HD300 Series Only) You will specify a disk for search playback. 1. The camera can pan between the start and end points you will set. (Refer to Step 1 to 4 of p. Search Mode HD300 Thumb Text Copy To activate auto pan Press the F1 button. The end point of auto pan will be set. By moving the 3D joystick. and the camera will pan between the set. During playback. Press the F4 button. (Refer to p. Display “Auto Pan” sub menu. When you specify a disk. press the F1 button at the point you wish to start playback.) 3. Then. (Refer to Step 1 to 4 of p.

(Refer to Step 1 to 4 of p. 1.) Note: Refer to the operating instructions of recorder for details on this function. The setup menu of selected system unit will appear on the active monitor. press the STOP button. 2. Display “HD300 Listed” sub menu. Display “HD500 V-Multi” sub menu. The playback end point (B) will be set. Press the F2 button at the point you wish to end playback.) HD300 Listed On Off F1 F2 F3 203 F4 Note: To recover the searching filter. Note: Depending on the recorder status. and the LCD display will return to Step 1. (Refer to Step 1 to 4 of p. 3. 61 To Recall Menu Functions. playback picture cannot be displayed. playback picture can be displayed on one of the multiscreen segments. Note: To quit the playback. The entered number will appear on the LCD. 1. The searching filter will be canceled. "s" mark may light up beside "Off. Press the F2 button.) System Setup On Off F1 F2 F3 F4 301 2. Note: The details on the setup menu differ depending on system units. and “s” mark will light up beside “On”. • Playback picture will be displayed on the multiscreen monitor. and “s” mark will light up beside “On”.3. G Filtering ON/OFF (WJ-HD300 Series Only) During the filtering playback. Refer to the operating instructions of system unit. Enter the channel number of camera whose playback picture you wish to display. press the STOP button. 61 To Recall Menu Functions. The searching filter will be recovered. press the F1 button. 1. 2. G Displaying Camera and Playback Image (WJ-HD500 Series Only) While camera images are being displayed in the multiscreen display. (Refer to Step 1 to 4 of p. (When the spot mode is activated for the camera image on the monitor.) HD300 Listed On Off F1 F2 F3 203 F4 HD500 V-Multi 204 Video CH=__5 Note: To quit the playback on the multiscreen monitor. the searching filter will be temporarily canceled or recovered. Press the F1 button. and “s” mark will light up beside “Off”. System Setup On Off F1 F2 F3 F4 301 HD500 V-Multi 204 "Input Video CH" 68 . and the repeat playback will be performed between (A) and (B). HD500 V-Multi ____5 "Enter F1 Button" Note: To cancel the numeric entry. Press the F1 button. • The specified camera channel will blink on the LCD for a few seconds. 61 To Recall Menu Functions. I System Functions G System Setup You can display the setup menu of selected system unit on the active monitor. Display “System Setup” sub menu. press the CLEAR button.

Numeric buttons: Enters a numeric parameter.) G On-screen Display (OSD) Control 1. the parameter will be cleared. Display “Mux VCR/CAM” sub menu. F2: Camera title Displays/hides the camera title. Button 0 (WJ-HD300 Series Only): If you enter only "0" for a parameter. (Refer to Step 1 to 4 of p. press the F2 button. One of the following OSD items will appear/disappear on/from the active monitor. Available buttons and functions F1: Clock Displays/hides the time and date. + button: Increases a numeric value. etc: Available Only for Switchers Installing Multiplexer Board) If a Multiplexer board is installed inside the switcher. G Video Loss History Table 1. (Refer to Step 1 to 4 of p. Top button: Determines the selected parameter and moves to the sub menu. MON (ESC) or EXIT button: Returns to the upper menu. Mux VCR/CAM VCR CAM F1 F2 F3 304 F4 69 . To close the VIDEO LOSS HISTORY table. Press the F1 button. 3D joystick downward (M): Moves the cursor down. 3D joystick leftward (t): Moves the cursor to the left. CLEAR button (WJ-HD300 Series Only): Clears an entry such as a password. Perform the camera setting while watching the setup menu on the monitor. 61 To Recall Menu Functions.) Mux VCR/CAM VCR CAM F1 F2 F3 304 F4 Switcher OSD 302 Clock Cam Event Mon F1 F2 F3 F4 Note: “s” mark will light up beside the activated setting. Display "Switcher OSD" sub menu. Zoom wheel controller to the left: Moves to the previous page. 61 To Recall Menu Functions. JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise: Changes the selected parameter. and “s” mark will light up beside the activated setting. The VIDEO LOSS HISTORY table will appear on the active monitor. (Refer to Step 1 to 4 of p. 2. 3. Press the F1 or F2 button. Shuttle ring counterclockwise: Moves to the previous page. 2. CAM (SET) button: Determines the selected parameter and moves to the sub menu. you can activate either VCR playback or camera picture display on an active monitor. Zoom wheel controller to the right: Moves to the next page. Press one of the F1 to F4 buttons. The setup menu of selected system unit will be closed. Available controls and functions <Main unit> Shuttle ring clockwise: Moves to the next page.) VLD History On Off F1 F2 F3 F4 303 2. Display "VLD History" sub menu. F4: Monitor status Displays/hides the monitor status. 3D joystick rightward (s): Moves the cursor to the right. Press the F2 button.3. F3: Event Displays/hides the event. – button: Decreases a numeric value. 1. G VCR/Camera Selection (WJ-FS416. 61 To Recall Menu Functions. The monitor display will be changed between playback pictures and live images. 4. and “s” mark will light up beside “Off”. <Joystick unit> 3D joystick upward (L): Moves the cursor up.

Camera Cleaning 401 Start Cancel 001-999 F1 F2 F3 F4 Mux Still ____9 "Enter F1 Button" Notes: • To cancel the numeric entry.Available buttons and functions F1: VCR Activates VCR playback. Display “Camera Cleaning” sub menu. 61 To Recall Menu Functions. press the CLEAR button. • Enter the camera number with the numeric buttons. G Still Mode (WJ-FS416. • Rotate the JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise. and the LCD display will return to Step 1. Press the F1 button.) Mux Still 305 "Input Still CH" 2. Display “Mux Still” sub menu. perform 1 to 3 again. 61 To Recall Menu Functions. Mux Still 305 Still CH=__9 Mux Still 305 Still CH=All Note: To return the multiscreen monitor display from the still mode to moving mode. Select the camera channel you wish to change to the still mode by performing either of the following. Select the camera to clean first by performing one of the following. 2. skip this step or enter “0”.) I Controller Functions G Camera Cleaning 1. • Press the + or – button. 3. • Press the + or – button. The cursor will jump to the next item. 4. Rotate the shuttle ring clockwise or move the 3D joystick to the right. F2: CAM Activates camera picture display. • Rotate the JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise. “s” mark will light up beside VCR. (Refer to Step 1 to 4 of p. 1. you can change the multiscreen monitor display from the moving mode to the still mode. Camera Cleaning 401 Start Cancel 003-999 F1 F2 F3 F4 Mux Still ____0 "Enter F1 Button" 3. The entered number will appear on the LCD. etc: Available Only for Switchers Installing Multiplexer Board) If a Multiplexer board is installed inside the switcher. • The specified camera channel will blink on the LCD for a few seconds. (Refer to Step 1 to 4 of p. 70 . • Press the + or – button. • The still mode will be activated for the selected camera channel. Note: If the Multiplexer board is receiving no video input signal. • Enter the camera number with the numeric buttons. • To activate the still mode for all camera channels or spot monitor display. • Enter the camera number with the numeric buttons. Select the camera to clean last by performing one of the following.

Time&Date Type 402 DD/MM/YYYY HH:MM 24 The following patterns are available. The display pattern will be set. Time&Date Type 402 Type0 Set OK? Note: To cancel the setting. 3.Camera Cleaning 401 Start Cancel 003-064 F1 F2 F3 F4 • Rotate the JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise. 4. rotate the shuttle ring counterclockwise or move the 3D joystick to the left. Invalid In this case. Camera cleaning will be cleared from the first to the last camera you have set. 61 To Recall Menu Functions. Note: To return the cursor to the previous item. Select a desired display pattern by performing either of the following. (Refer to Step 1 to 4 of p. • Press the + or – button. Display pattern Display Example DD/MM/YYYY HH:MM 24 21/08/2001 22:55 24 *2 MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM 24 08/21/2001 22:55 24 DD/Mmm/YYYY HH:MM 24 21/Aug/2001 22:55 24 YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM 24 2001/08/21 22:55 24 Mmm/DD/YYYY HH:MM 24 Aug/21/2001 22:55 24 DD/MM/YYYY HH:MM 12 21/08/2001 10:55 12 MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM 12 08/21/2001 10:55 12 DD/Mmm/YYYY HH:MM 12 21/Aug/2001 10:55 12 YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM 12 2001/08/21 10:55 12 Mmm/DD/YYYY HH:MM 12 Aug/21/2001 10:55 12 *1 *1 Factory default for U. (Refer to Step 1 to 4 of p. “Memory” will appear on the LCD for a few seconds.1 Off 403 71 . G Time & Date Search Display Pattern You can set up the clock display pattern of the LCD for the time & date search. Display “Time & Date Type” sub menu. Camera Cleaning 401 Start Cancel Cam028 When the all cameras have started to be cleaned. Press the ENTER or CAM (SET) button. Press the F1 button.) Time&Date Type 402 Mmm/DD/YYYY HH:MM 12 2. Display “Auto Login” sub menu. During the cleaning. “Invalid” will appear on the LCD. 1. “Set OK?” will appear on the LCD. operators can log into or log out of the system automatically. Note: You cannot set both Auto Login and Auto Logout to ON for the same system controller.) Time&Date Type 402 Type0 Memory G Auto Login/Logout Setup If auto login or auto logout is activated. select a higher camera channel for the last camera. 61 To Recall Menu Functions. “End” will appear on the LCD. press the F2 button. “12” means 12 hour display and “24” means 24 hour display. press the EXIT or MON (ESC) button. • If you have selected a lower channel for the last camera than the first camera. models *2 Factory default for Europe models Note: In this diagram. and the LCD display will return to Step 1. Auto Login/out Cont No. Press the ENTER or CAM (SET) button again.S. You can select a desired one from 10 patterns. 1. • It may take a few minutes since “End” appears on the LCD until camera cleaning ends. Camera Cleaning Start Cancel 401 End Notes: • To quit the cleaning. 5. the current channel number will be displayed on the LCD.

and the LCD display will return to Step 1. Select an operator to register or change the settings by performing either of the following. "Memory” will appear on the LCD for a few seconds. * The numbers mean minutes. • Auto Logout setting will be activated after you log into the system again. Operator 1 → Operator 2 …→ Operator 16 → Logout 5 → Logout 10 …→ Logout 120 → Operator 1 … • To return the cursor to Cont No. Auto Login/out 403 Cont No. “Erased” will appear on the LCD for a few seconds.6 Clear OK? Note: To cancel deactivating auto login. Auto Login/out 403 Cont No. Notes: • Refer to p. n. 1”. press the EXIT or MON (ESC) button. select the duration until auto logout (Logout 5 to 120)* by performing the following. Operator Setup Operator01 404 2. Auto Login/out 403 Cont No. • Press the + or – button. • Rotate the JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise.6 Logout 30 Notes: • Parameters can be changed as follows. Press the ENTER or CAM (SET) button again. Auto Login/out 403 Cont No. Select a system controller to activate auto login or auto logout by performing either of the following. “Set OK?” will appear on the LCD. press the EXIT or MON (ESC) button. press the EXIT or MON (ESC) button. • To return to the previous step. 1. Display “Operator Setup” sub menu. 61 To Recall Menu Functions. Auto Login/out 403 Cont No. Up to 16 operators are registrable in the system. 4. (Refer to Step 1 to 4 of p. • Rotate the JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise. Select a system controller to deactivate auto login or auto logout by performing either of the following. “Clear OK?” will appear on the LCD. • Press the + or – button. Press the ENTER or CAM (SET) button.6 Logout 30 2. To activate auto login. 38 Operation Start (Login) for the factory default. • Press the + or – button. Auto Login/out 403 Cont No. Press the ENTER or CAM (SET) button. • Press the + or – button. 6. and the LCD display will return to Step 1.2. select an operator (Operator 1 to 16) by performing the following. • Rotate the JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise. 3. Auto login will be set.6 Operator06 To activate auto logout. 3. 5. To deactivate auto login or auto logout 1. • Rotate the JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise.6 Set OK? Note: To cancel the setting. Rotate the shuttle ring clockwise or move the 3D joystick to the right. Auto login or auto logout will be deactivated.6 Off 403 Note: The factory default is “Cont No. Auto Login/out Cont No. • Press the + or – button.6 Operator06 Auto Login/out 403 Cont No.6 Erased G Operator Registration or Change You can register new operators or change the parameter settings.) Auto Login/out 403 Cont No. rotate the shuttle ring counterclockwise or move the 3D joystick to the left. Press the CLEAR button. • Rotate the JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise.6 Memory 72 .

12. “1” to “99999” are available for the password. “Level 1 Fixed” will appear on the LCD. press the CLEAR button. 74 Function Level Setting for details on function level. Press the ENTER or CAM (SET) button again. • You cannot change the camera level of Operator 1. Operator07 Set OK? 404 Operator07 Function Level 404 = 1 8. Operator07 Camera Level 404 = 2 Operator07 Password= 404 12345 6. 7. Note: If you have entered a wrong user ID. Press the ENTER or CAM (SET) button. 75 Camera Level Setting for details on camera level. 5. “1” to “99999” are available for the user ID number. “Camera Level” setting menu will appear on the LCD. Press the ENTER or CAM (SET) button. • Press the + or – button. Operator Setup 404 Operator07 No Assign Notes: • Refer to p. Press the ENTER or CAM (SET) button. Enter a password by pressing the numeric buttons. Enter a user ID by pressing the numeric buttons. • Rotate the JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise. “Memory” will appear on the LCD for a few seconds. Set the function level by performing either of the following. Note: If you have entered a wrong password. and the LCD display will return to Step 1. select an operator number beside which “No Assign” is displayed. Operator07 User ID= 404 1 4. Press the ENTER or CAM (SET) button. “Level 1 Fixed” will appear on the LCD. Operator07 Camera Level 404 = 1 Operator07 User ID= 404 777 10. • You cannot change the function level of Operator 1. “Function Level” setting menu will appear on the LCD. The password entry form will appear on the LCD. Operator01 404 Level1 Fixed 9. If you try to change. “Set OK?” will appear on the LCD. 3. press the CLEAR button. The new operator and the settings will be registered. • Press the + or – button. Operator07 Password= 404 333 Operator01 404 Level1 Fixed 11. “User ID” setting menu will appear on the LCD. If you try to change.Operator Setup Operator02 404 Operator07 Function Level 404 = 2 Note: When registering a new operator. Operator07 Memory 404 73 . Press the ENTER or CAM (SET) button. Set the camera level by performing either of the following. Notes: • Refer to p. • Rotate the JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise.

To delete an operator Note: You cannot delete Operator 1. “Level1 Fixed” will appear on the LCD. Select a desired table (= function level) by performing either of the following. If you try to delete. Press the CLEAR button. 1 is fixed to E (Enabled) for all the functions. Select a desired function by performing one of the following. 4. 61 To Recall Menu Functions. • Enter the table number with the numeric buttons. Display “Function Level” sub menu. Operator Setup 404 Operator15 No Assign 2. The setting menu for the selected table will appear on the LCD. • Rotate the JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise. • Press the + or – button. • “Erased” will appear on the LCD for a few seconds. The function setting will appear on the LCD. “No Assign” will appear beside the operator number. • Press the + or – button. The function levels range between Table No. Function Level Table No. Function Table2 405 08 IRIS OPEN/CLOSE=E The following diagram describes the function settings changeable and their factory defaults. • The operator will be deleted. Select an operator to delete by performing either of the following. • Enter the function number with the numeric buttons.) Operator01 404 Level1 Fixed 1. Function Table2 01 MENU 405 =E Operator Setup 404 Operator07 Clear OK? Note: To cancel deleting the operator. 1. and the LCD display will return to Step 1. 405 =1 2. Operator Setup 404 Operator07 No Assign G Function Level Setting You can change the function levels for each button (except for numeric buttons) of main unit and 3D joystick unit. Press the CAM (SET) button. 74 . “No Assign” will appear beside the operator number. 1 (highest level) and 3 (Lowest level). 405 =2 Note: If you select an operator not registered. Operator Setup Operator07 404 Function Level Table No. 3. (Refer to Step 1 to 4 of p. 3. press the EXIT or MON (ESC) button. “Clear OK?” will appear on the LCD. • Press the + or – button. • Rotate the JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise. • Rotate the JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise. Operator Setup 404 Operator07 Erased Note: After the operator has been deleted. Note: Table No. Press the ENTER or CAM (SET) button.

Rotate the shuttle ring clockwise or move the 3D joystick to the right. • Enter the camera number with the numeric buttons. 8. Press the ENTER or CAM (SET) button again. • Press the + or – button. Display “Camera Level” sub menu. “Memory” will appear on the LCD for a few seconds. • As the factory default. press the EXIT or MON (ESC) button. 1 is fixed to E (Enabled) for all cameras. Press the ENTER or CAM (SET) button. Table No. Camera Level Table No. • Press the + or – button. 1 (highest level) and 3 (Lowest level). rotate the shuttle ring counterclockwise or move the 3D joystick to the left. 2. Camera Level Table No. Function Table2 Memory 405 The function levels will be set for the selected table. 406 =3 3.Function Table 2 Table 3 D E E E E E E D E E E E E E D E E E E E E E D D E E E E E E E E E E E D D E E E E 01 MENU D 02 F1 – F4 E 03 F5 – F8 E 04 A B E 05 TOP SW E 06 JOYSTICK E 07 FOCUS NEAR/FAR E 08 IRIS OPEN/CLOSE E 09 CAM/SET E 10 MON/ESC E 11 UNIT E 12 RECORDER E 13 CAM POSI E 14 PRESET E 15 PGM PRESET D 16 HISTORY E 17 –/+ E 18 JOG DIAL E 19 SHUTTLE RING E 20 SHUTTLE HOLD E 21 PLAY/PAUSE E 22 STOP E 23 REC E 24 ALM SUSPEND E 25 ALM RESET E 26 OSD E 27 ALM RECALL E 28 SEQ PAUSE E 29 SEQUENCE E 30 MULTI SCREEN E 31 EL-ZOOM E 32 AUX1 ON/OFF E 33 AUX2 ON/OFF E 34 DEF ON/OFF E 35 WIPER ON E 36 SYS FUNC D 37 CAM FUNC D 38 GO TO LAST E 39 MARK E 40 SEARCH E 41 T&D SEARCH E Function Table2 Set OK? 405 Note: To cancel the setting. Press the CAM (SET) button. • Rotate the JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise. • Press the + or – button. 61 To Recall Menu Functions. 1. 6. and the LCD display will return to Step 1. G Camera Level Setting You can change the camera levels for each operator. 7. Select a desired camera channel by performing one of the following. • Rotate the JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise. Function Table2 405 08 IRIS OPEN/CLOSE=D Note: To change the settings of other functions. • Rotate the JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise. Select E or D by performing either of the following. The LCD display will return to Step 6. (Refer to Step 1 to 4 of p. D=Disabled 5. 406 =1 Function Table2 405 08 IRIS OPEN/CLOSE=E Note: To return to Step 4. 75 . The cursor will jump to the next item. • Enter the function number with the numeric buttons. “Set OK?” will appear on the LCD.) E=Enabled. repeat Step 4 to 6. Select a desired table (= camera level) by performing one of the following. The camera levels range between Table No. Notes: • Table No. 2 and 3 are set to E for all cameras. The setting menu for the selected table will appear on the LCD. Camera Table3 Cam001 406 =E 4.

repeat Step 4 to 6. 6. Camera Table3 Cam064 406 =E Note: To return to Step 4. • Press the + or – button. • Rotate the JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise.) Note: You can select a camera channel from 1 to 999. The cursor will jump to the next item. Select a camera position number to register by performing one of the following. “Set OK?” will appear on the LCD. 3. • Press the + or – button. (VIEW ONLY) Note: To change the settings of other cameras. rotate the shuttle ring counterclockwise or move the 3D joystick to the left.Camera Table3 Cam064 406 =E G Camera Position Registration or Clearing This system controller can memorize camera position numbers. • Rotate the JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise. Camera Table3 Memory 406 5. The LCD display will return to Step 6. (Refer to Step 1 to 4 of p. press the EXIT or MON (ESC) button. you can select a desired camera and preset position at a time. 8. The cursor will jump to the next item. 5. • Press the + or – button. which are the combination of camera numbers and preset position numbers. press the numeric buttons. You can register up to 1 000 camera position numbers. Select E (= Enabled) or D (= Disabled) by performing either of the following. Rotate the shuttle ring clockwise or move the 3D joystick to the right. “Memory” will appear on the LCD for a few seconds. Cam Posi Map 407 Cam-P016 C005 Pre016 Note: You can select a camera channel from 1 to 999. Rotate the shuttle ring clockwise or move the 3D joystick to the right. 76 . Press the ENTER or CAM (SET) button again. rotate the shuttle ring counterclockwise or move the 3D joystick to the left. Press the ENTER or CAM (SET) button. 4. and the LCD display will return to Step 1. Rotate the shuttle ring clockwise or move the 3D joystick to the right. 61 To Recall Menu Functions. Display “Cam Posi Map” sub menu. but cannot control the panning/tilting. Select a desired camera channel by performing one of the following. Cam Posi Map 407 Cam-P001 C001 Pre001 2. 7. • Enter the camera position number with the numeric buttons. (VIEW & CONTROL) D (= Disabled): The operator can display the camera image on the monitor. • You can select a camera position number from 0 to 999. The cursor will jump to the next item. 1. rotate the shuttle ring counterclockwise or move the 3D joystick to the left. Cam Posi Map 407 Cam-P016 C001 Pre016 Notes: • To register a new position number. The camera levels will be set for the selected table. Camera Table3 Set OK? 406 Note: To cancel the setting. • Rotate the JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise. By entering a camera position number. Camera Table3 Cam064 406 =D E (= Enabled): The operator can display the camera image on the monitor and control panning/tilting. Note: To return to Step 4. Note: To return to Step 2. • Enter the camera number with the numeric buttons.

and the LCD display will return to Step 1. Press the ENTER or CAM (SET) button. “Memory” will appear on the LCD for a few seconds. Select a desired preset position number by performing either of the following. • Rotate the JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise. • You can select a camera channel from 1 to 999. 1. 77 . display the “s” mark beside “Disable” by rotating the shuttle ring counterclockwise or moving the 3D joystick to the left. The camera-unit setting will appear on the LCD. Cam Posi Map 407 Cam-P016 Clear OK? Note: To cancel deleting the camera position. The camera position will be deleted. Cam Posi Map Cam-P016 Memory To delete a camera position 407 Cam-Unit Map 408 Disable Enable 2. • Enter the camera number with the numeric buttons. Cam Posi Map 407 Cam-P016 C005 Pre032 2. G Associating Camera Numbers with Unit Numbers You can register camera-unit maps (the association of camera numbers and unit numbers). Cam Posi Map 407 Cam-P016 Erased Cam Posi Map 407 Cam-P016 C005 Pre032 Note: You can select a preset position number from 1 to 256. Select a camera position to delete by performing either of the following. Press the ENTER or CAM (SET) button. Cam-Unit Map 408 Disable Enable Note: To disable camera-unit maps. 61 To Recall Menu Functions. Press the ENTER or CAM (SET) button. • Press the + or – button. Up to 999 camera unit maps can be registered. • Rotate the JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise. You can select a camera by entering the camera channel alone. The specified camera channel and preset position number will be set for the selected camera position. press the EXIT or MON (ESC) button.) Cam Posi Map 407 Cam-P016 Set OK? Note: To cancel the setting. Press the CLEAR button. Select a desired camera channel by performing one of the following. “Clear OK?” will appear on the LCD. “Erased” will appear on the LCD for a few seconds. • Press the + or – button. Cam-Unit Map 408 Cam016 Unit01 Notes: • To register a new position number. 7. 8. Press the ENTER or CAM (SET) button again. Cam-Unit Map 408 Cam001 Unit01 3. The LCD display will return to Step 6. “Set OK?” will appear on the LCD. Note: If “Enable” is selected in Step 2. (Refer to Step 1 to 4 of p. press the EXIT or MON (ESC) button. and the LCD display will return to Step 1. 3. • Rotate the JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise. 1.6. • Press the + or – button. • The following are the factory default settings. Display “Cam-Unit Map” sub menu. even if the camera is connected to system unit not currently selected. you can select only camera numbers associated with unit numbers. press the numeric buttons.

61 To Recall Menu Functions.Rotate the shuttle ring clockwise or move the 3D joystick to the right. Press the ENTER or CAM (SET) button. (Refer to Step 1 to 4 of p. rotate the shuttle ring counterclockwise or move the 3D joystick to the left. “Clear OK?” will appear on the LCD. 6. Press the CLEAR button. Display “HDD-Unit Map” sub menu. Select a desired unit number by performing either of the following. “Cam000” will appear for the camera channel area. rotate the shuttle ring counterclockwise or move the 3D joystick to the left. 77 Associating Camera Numbers with Unit Numbers. The cursor will jump to the next item. and the LCD display will return to Step 3. Select a desired unit number by performing either of the following. The cursor will jump to the next item. 4. • Press the + or – button. Note: To return to Step 2. “Erased” will appear on the LCD for a few seconds. 3. 7. Cam-Unit Map 408 Cam016 Memory To delete a camera-unit map 1. Up to 16 HDD-unit maps can be registered. HDD-Unit Map 409 HDD06 Unit05 78 .. Press the ENTER or CAM (SET) button again. 5. Cam-Unit Map 408 Cam016 Set OK? Note: To cancel the setting. Cam-Unit Map 408 Cam016 Erased Note: After all the camera-unit maps have been deleted. Select a desired recorder number by performing either of the following. • Rotate the JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise.) 1. “HDD02” with “Unit02”.Default settings of camera-unit maps Cam Unit 001 to 016 01 017 to 032 02 033 to 048 03 049 to 064 04 065 to 256 –– 4. The LCD display will return to Step 6. • Rotate the JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise. Perform Step 1 to 3 in p. press the EXIT or MON (ESC) button. HDD-Unit Map 409 HDD06 Unit06 Note: You can select a recorder number from 1 to 16. G Associating Recorder Numbers with Unit Numbers You can register HDD-unit maps (the association settings of recorder numbers and unit numbers). • Press the + or – button. 2. and the LCD display will return to Step 1.. Cam-Unit Map 408 Cam016 Clear OK? Note: To cancel deleting the setting. “Memory” will appear on the LCD for a few seconds. press the EXIT or MON (ESC) button. • Press the + or – button. 3 . recorder numbers have been associated with unit numbers having the same numbers. The specified camera channel and unit number will be set for the selected camera-unit map. • Rotate the JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise. (“HDD01” with “Unit01”. Note: To return to Step 3. You can select a recorder by entering a desired recorder number. HDD-Unit Map 409 HDD01 Unit01 2. Rotate the shuttle ring clockwise or move the 3D joystick to the right.) Cam-Unit Map 408 Cam016 Unit02 Note: You can select a unit number from 1 to 99. Note: As the factory default. “Set OK?” will appear on the LCD. The camera-unit map will be deleted. Press the ENTER or CAM (SET) button.

rotate the shuttle ring (clockwise or counterclockwise) or move the 3D joystick (to the right or left) • To delete a character.<=>?[¥]^_{|}→←@ HDD-Unit Map 409 HDD06 Clear OK? Note: To cancel deleting the setting.Note: You can select a unit number from 1 to 99. The HDD-unit map will be deleted. 2. LCD Title F1-F4 410 F1 F2 F3 F4 When "F1 — F4" is selected LCD Title F5-F8 410 F5 F6 F7 F8 When "F5 — F8" is selected HDD-Unit Map 409 HDD06 Memory To delete a HDD-unit map 1. 61 To Recall Menu Functions. Press the ENTER or CAM (SET) button. Press the ENTER or CAM (SET) button. controllability will be improved. 4. “Erased” will appear on the LCD for a few seconds. “Set OK?” will appear on the LCD. and the LCD display will return to Step 1. LCD Title F1-F4 F5-F8 410 HDD-Unit Map 409 HDD06 Set OK? Note: To cancel the setting. 5. Press the ENTER or CAM (SET) button again. If you set LCD titles related to the registered button functions. • Rotate the JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise. LCD Title F1-F4 Set OK? 410 G LCD Title Editing You can edit button function titles displayed on the LCD.) • The following diagram describes the available characters. 79 . Press the ENTER or CAM (SET) button. Character group Space Capital letters Small letters Numerics Symbols Characters “”(Space) I ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz 0123456789 !”#$%&’()∗+. “Memory” will appear on the LCD for a few seconds. Notes: • To move the cursor. “HDD-Unit Map Check” menu will appear on the LCD. and the LCD display will return to Step 1. 3. 78 Associating Recorder Numbers with Unit Numbers. 5. when the cursor is pointed on “C”. “Memory” will appear on the LCD for a few seconds. Press the ENTER or CAM (SET) button. The LCD title you have edited will be registered. Select desired characters by performing either of the following.(For example. 3. (Refer to Step 1 to 4 of p. Select a desired title group (F1-F4 or F5-F8) by rotating the shuttle ring or moving the 3D joystick. 1 . 2. • Press the + or – button. press the CLEAR button.Display “LCD Title” sub menu. “Set OK?” will appear on the LCD. Press the ENTER or CAM (SET) button again. “Clear OK?” will appear on the LCD. HDD-Unit Map 409 HDD06 Erased Note: After all the HDD-unit maps have been deleted. press the EXIT or MON (ESC) button./:. “a” can be displayed by rotating the JogDial clockwise while holding down the SHIFT button. “HDD00” will appear for the camera channel area. The title editing form will appear on the LCD. Perform Step 1 and 2 in p. The LCD display will return to Step 4. press the EXIT or MON (ESC) button. • To display the next or previous character group. press the EXIT or MON (ESC) button. The LCD display will return to Step 4. and the LCD display will return to Step 1.–. The specified recorder number and unit number will be set for the selected HDD-unit map. 6. Press the CLEAR button. 6. rotate the JogDial while holding down the SHIFT button.) Note: To cancel the setting.

• The specified system function will blink on the LCD for a few seconds. the LCD display will become as follows. you can activate the associated function only with pressing the button. 1. 1. Display “Camera Function” sub menu. Camera Function____7 "Enter F1 Button" Notes: • To cancel the numeric entry. System Function____5 "Enter F1 Button" Notes: • To cancel the numeric entry. Enter a system function number by pressing the numeric buttons. and the LCD will return to the default status. the image of selected camera will be displayed on the active monitor. • The associated system function will be activated. and the LCD display will return to Step 1. • The associated camera function will be activated. System Function 502 Code=___5 Note: When the system function has been activated by the A button. press the CLEAR button. System Function A Code=0018 Camera Function 501 Code=___7 Note: When the camera function has been activated by the A button.) System Function 502 "Input Code Number" 2. 61 To Recall Menu Functions. Press the F1 button. 3. • If you press the CAM (SET) button.) G Camera Function You can recall camera functions by entering function numbers from this system controller. and the LCD will return to the default status. (Refer to Step 1 to 4 of p. (Refer to Step 1 to 4 of p. Note: Refer to the operating instruction of camera for details on camera function. and the LCD display will return to Step 1. 80 . G System Function You can recall system functions by entering function numbers from this system controller. press the CLEAR button. 61 To Recall Menu Functions. The entered number will appear on the LCD. the LCD display will become as follows. the image of selected camera will be displayed on the active monitor.LCD Title F1-F4 Memory 410 Camera Function A Code=0007 I Joystick Button Functions If you register a joystick button function to a function button or joystick function button. Press the F1 button. Display “Camera Function” sub menu. • If you press the CAM (SET) button. The entered number will appear on the LCD. Camera Function 501 "Input Code Number" 2 Enter a camera function number by pressing the numeric buttons. 3. • The specified camera function will blink on the LCD for a few seconds. Note: Refer to the operating instruction of system unit for details on system function.

1. The camera sequence mode will be activated. 1. 1. Note: When the patrol play mode has been activated with the A button. (Refer to Step 1 to 4 of p. The auto pan mode will be activated. Note: When the camera sequence mode has been activated with the A button. Display “Auto Pan” sub menu. Press the F1 button. Note: When the camera sort mode has been activated with the A button. 61 To Recall Menu Functions. Note: Refer to the operating instruction of camera for details of this function. Camera Sort Auto Pan A A G Patrol Play G Camera Sequence You can activate the camera sequence mode for the selected camera.) Camera Sequence 504 “Enter F1 Button” F1 F2 F3 F4 Patrol Play 506 “Enter F1 Button” F1 F2 F3 F4 2. 61 To Recall Menu Functions. The camera sort mode will be activated.G Auto Pan You can activate the auto pan mode for the selected camera. Note: Refer to the operating instruction of camera for details of this function. 61 To Recall Menu Functions. Note: Refer to the operating instruction of camera for details of this function.) G Camera Sort You can activate the auto sort mode for the selected camera. Display “Patrol Play” sub menu. Patrol Play Camera Sequence A A 81 . (Refer to Step 1 to 4 of p. Display “Camera Sequence” sub menu. (Refer to Step 1 to 4 of p. the LCD display will become as follows.) You can activate the patrol play function for the selected camera. (Refer to Step 1 to 4 of p. Press the F1 button. 2. Note: When the auto pan function has been activated with the A button. The patrol play mode will be activated. the LCD display will become as follows. 61 To Recall Menu Functions. 1. the LCD display will become as follows. 2. Press the F1 button. Note: Refer to the operating instruction of camera for details of this function. Display “Camera Sort” sub menu.) Auto Pan 503 “Enter F1 Button” F1 F2 F3 F4 Camera Sort 505 “Enter F1 Button” F1 F2 F3 F4 2. Press the F1 button. the LCD display will become as follows.

the LCD display will become as follows. Press the F1 button.G Home Position You can move the selected camera to the home position. Note: Refer to the operating instruction of camera for details of this function. (Refer to Step 1 to 4 of p. The camera will move to the home position. Note: When the Camera +1 function has been activated with the A button. the LCD display will become as follows Camera +1 Auto Focus A A 82 . Note: When the home position has been activated with the A button. Press the F1 button. The image of higher camera channel will be displayed on the active monitor. 61 To Recall Menu Functions. 2. Note: When the auto focus function has been activated with the A button. 2. 61 To Recall Menu Functions. Home Position A Iris Reset A G Auto Focus You can activate the auto focus function for the selected camera.) G Iris Reset You can activate the iris reset function for the selected camera. 61 To Recall Menu Functions. Display “Auto Focus” sub menu. the LCD display will become as follows. The iris reset function will be activated.) G Camera +1 You can change the camera image on the monitor to the higher channel. Note: Refer to the operating instruction of camera for details of this function. 1. the LCD display will become as follows. Note: When the iris reset function has been activated with the A button. Display “Camera +1” sub menu. 1. Press the F1 button.) Camera +1 510 “Enter F1 Button” F1 F2 F3 F4 Auto Focus 508 “Enter F1 Button” F1 F2 F3 F4 2. 1. (Refer to Step 1 to 4 of p. 61 To Recall Menu Functions. (Refer to Step 1 to 4 of p. Press the F1 button.) Home Position 507 “Enter F1 Button” F1 F2 F3 F4 Iris Reset 509 “Enter F1 Button” F1 F2 F3 F4 2. Note: Refer to the operating instruction of camera for details of this function. 1 Display “Home Position” sub menu. The auto focus function will be activated. Display “Iris Reset” sub menu. (Refer to Step 1 to 4 of p.

Then. 61 To Recall Menu Functions. Note: Refer to the operating instruction of recorder for details of this function. 3. Note: Refer to the operating instruction of recorder for details of this function. (Refer to Step 1 to 4 of p. the LCD display will become as follows. Display “HD500 Copy” sub menu. 61 To Recall Menu Functions. Press the F1 button. 1. 67 A – B Repeat Playback Setting. Press the F1 button again at the point you wish to end playback. press the F1 button again. and “End” will appear on the LCD for a few seconds. The playback end point (B) will be set. Note: When the Camera –1 function has been activated with the A button.) HD300 A—B Repeat 512 “Enter F1 Button” F1 F2 F3 F4 2. Press the F1 button. HD300 A—B Repeat 512 Start F1 F2 F3 F4 HD500 Copy 513 “Enter F1 Button” F1 F2 F3 F4 2. Refer to p. (Refer to Step 1 to 4 of p. 1. 83 .) HD300 A—B Repeat End A HD300 A—B Repeat Cancel A G Recorded-image Copy (WJ-HD500 Series Only) You can copy recorded images from the built-in hard disk to an external recording device. the LCD display will become as follows. the repeat playback will be performed between (A) and (B). • When the A – B repeat playback function has been activated with the function button. (Refer to Step 1 to 4 of p. Display “Camera –1” sub menu. 61 To Recall Menu Functions. HD300 A—B Repeat 512 Cancel 2. Note: When the record copy function has been activated with the A button. HD300 A—B Repeat Start A Camera -1 A G A . The playback start point (A) will be set.) HD300 A—B Repeat 512 End F1 F2 F3 F4 Camera -1 511 “Enter F1 Button” F1 F2 F3 F4 Notes: • To quit the repeat playback. Display “HD300 A – B Repeat” sub menu. 1. The record copy function will be activated. and “Start” will appear on the LCD for a few seconds. Press the F1 button at the point you wish to start playback. “Cancel” will appear on the LCD for a few seconds.B Repeat Playback (WJ-HD300 Series Only) The description is the same as that of button function. The image of lower camera channel will be displayed on the active monitor. the LCD display will become as follows.G Camera –1 You can change the camera image on the monitor to the lower channel.

) 4-segment multiscreen display 16-segment multiscreen display Multi 16-Seg 520 “Enter F1 Button” F1 F2 F3 F4 2. The multiscreen display function will be activated.) Multi 7-Seg 516 “Enter F1 Button” F1 F2 F3 F4 9-segment multiscreen display Multi 9-Seg 517 “Enter F1 Button” F1 F2 F3 F4 HD200 Alm Search 514 “Enter F1 Button” F1 F2 F3 F4 10-segment multiscreen display Multi 10-Seg 518 “Enter F1 Button” 2. Refer to the operating instructions of system units. Display a desired sub menu among the following. (Refer to Step 1 to 4 of p. 61 To Recall Menu Functions. the LCD display will become as follows. (Refer to Step 1 to 4 of p. Display “HD200 Alm Search” sub menu.HD500 Copy A 7-segment multiscreen display G Alarm Search (WJ-HD200 Series / WJ-HD100 Series) You can move the playback start point to the next alarm record of recorded image data. The alarm search function will be activated. the LCD display will become as follows. Press the F1 button. Note: When the alarm search function has been activated with the A button. Note: When the multiscreen display function has been activated with the A button. 61 To Recall Menu Functions. Press the F1 button. Multi 4-Seg 515 “Enter F1 Button” F1 F2 F3 F4 Multi 4-Seg A 84 . 1. 1. Note: Available multiscreen segment patterns differ depending on system units. Note: Refer to the operating instruction of recorder for details of this function. F1 F2 F3 F4 13-segment multiscreen display HD200 Alm Search A Multi 13-Seg 519 “Enter F1 Button” F1 F2 F3 F4 G Multiscreen Display You can change the multiscreen segment patterns of monitor connected to the selected system unit.

Refer to pp. 24. 36. / Characters do not appear on the LCD. Check the connection. Users who have logged into the system may not be authorized to control cameras with the 3D joystick.TROUBLESHOOTING Check the following before requesting repair. The brightness of LCD is not enough. The DC plug may not be firmly plugged into the DC 9 V Input jack of system controller. 21. Check their combination codes. and turn on the power again. Problem The power of system controller is not turned on. You may have turned on the power while some buttons of system controller was held down. Check the connection. Refer to p. Login standby display does not appear on the LCD. Check the connections. 38 and 39. 20. Reference Refer to p. You may have entered a wrong password. Check no buttons are being held down. 25. If the password is wrong. 85 . Check the settings and turn on the power again. Users cannot log into the system. Refer to p. 38. contact your dealer. The line termination settings of MODE switches may be wrong. Refer to p. Refer to p. Refer to p. 24. Refer to p. Refer to p. 38 and 39. Check the user level settings of these users. 36. You may have entered a wrong user ID. Refer to p. Panning. Check the settings and turn on the power again. 72 to 76. Check item and Remedy The AC adapter may be disconnected from either the system controller or the AC outlet. or zooming is activated even when you are not controlling the 3D joystick. The speed of panning and tilting is not equal depending on directions. Reenter the password correctly. 36. Check the connection. Reenter the user ID correctly. Refer to pp. If a trouble cannot be corrected even after checking and trying remedy. Refer to pp. Refer to p. switch may be wrong. The display setting value of LCD may be improper. the LCD will return to the login standby display. Check the setting. tilting. Cables may be disconnected from either the DATA ports of system controller or other system units. The cable may be disconnected from either the main unit or 3D joystick unit. The settings of MODE switches at the rear panel may be wrong. Users cannot control cameras with the 3D joystick. Check the setting and turn on the power again. 21. The setting of CONTROLLER NO. The combination codes of main unit and 3D joystick unit may not be identical.

Refer to p. Check the connection. Users who have logged into the system may not be authorized to control cameras with these buttons. — Refer to pp. a fire or an electric shock may occur. Refer to p. Can the selected monitor. or system unit activate the function assigned to the button? Depending on system devices. Check the user level settings of these users. 79. 63 and 64. Check the setting. Check the settings. The cable may be disconnected from either the system controller or 3D joystick. "Controller No. Check the settings. B. There may be no system controller set to CONTROLLER NO. Unplug the AC adapter immediately. Refer to pp. 63 and 64. 21. 1. Users who have logged into the system may not be authorized to control cameras with the button. Check that no users are controlling other system controllers. there is a difference between the function displayed on the LCD and that recalled actually. 38. and refer servicing to qualified service personnel. 72 to 76. 72 to 76. switch at the rear panel of each system controller. If you continue to use it. The power cord insulation is damaged. 72 to 76. Refer to pp. There may be a user controlling system units from another system controller. Reference You cannot activate any functions even when pressing the A. Users who have logged into the system may not be authorized to control cameras with these buttons.Problem Buzzer sound is not heard. Refer to pp. available functions will differ. The LCD title may have been edited wrongly. Check the user level settings of these users. You cannot activate any functions even when pressing the function buttons (F1 to F4/F5 to F8). Refer to p. The power cord gets warm or hot if bent or pulled during use. 63 and 64.1. There is an invalid button even when it is pressed. “ALM SUSPEND” indicator light up or goes out even when no system unit is controlled. Check the settings. Check the user level settings of these users. Refer to p. When pressing one of the function buttons (F1 to F4/F5 to F8). Function assignment settings of the F1 to F8 buttons may be wrong.1 No Exist Error" is displayed on the LCD. Refer to pp. — The power cord and the power plug of the AC adapter are hot during use. Check item and Remedy The buzzer may be set to OFF. Refer to the operating instructions of selected system unit. The power cord or the plug is damaged. camera. 25. Check the setting. Operation is suddenly discontinued while controlling system units. Check the CONTROLLER NO. or top button of the 3D joystick unit. Function assignment settings of the F1 to F8 buttons may be wrong. B or top button may be wrong. A system controller must be set to CONTROLLER NO. Function assignment settings of the A. Refer to pp. — — — 86 .

..... Full duplex) x2 9-pin D-sub connector 1 to 8 (rotary switch) –10 °C to + 50 °C {14 °F to 122 °F}* 1 to 99** 1 to 99** 1 to 256** 290 mm (W) x 111 mm (H) x 221 mm (D) {11-7/16 in...... (D)} 134 mm (W) x 146 mm (H) x 218 mm (D) {5-1/4 in.3 kg {2. 1 pc......9 lbs.. ● DATA Port RS-485 Port System controller’s rear panel Internal block TA TB RA GND RA RB GND TA TB RB IN OUT STANDARD ACCESSORIES Operating Instructions (This Document) ..8 lbs. (H) X 8-11/16 in. 600 mA (using the supplied AC adapter) 9 V DC.. RJ-45 x 1 6-conductor modular jack (RS-485.... 300 mA (using the supplied AC adapter) 120 V AC.. Refer to the operating instructions of system devices for the terminal mode and Ethernet mode........} * The performance is not guaranteed until the inside temperature rises up to 0 °C {32 °F}.... (D)} 1...... 6-conductor Modular Cable (3 m) .... 87 ..SPECIFICATIONS ● System Controller Power Source WV-CU950: WV-CU650: Supplied AC Adapter: Ethernet Port (WV-CU950 only): Data Output/Input Port: Serial Port: Controller Number: Ambient Operating Temperature: Unit Number Selection: Monitor Number Selection: Camera Number Selection: Dimensions Main Unit: 3D Joystick Unit: Weight Main Unit: 3D Joystick Unit: 9 V DC... ** These values are applicable in the PS·Data mode only.... The following parts are used during installation procedures... 200 mA 10/100 Base-T...... 1 pc......... 60 Hz..... (H) x 8-9/16 in.. (W) x 4-3/8 in.. Parts No: N0JBEF000001) ........ (W) x 5-3/4 in... 1 pc..8 kg {1...} (without the AC adapter) 0........ AC Adapter (UL Listed.

All Rights Reserved.. Unit Company of Panasonic Corporation of North America Security Systems www. Secaucus. 00985(809)750-4300 © 2005 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co. Randal Road. New Jersey 07094 Central: 1707 N.R.733.panasonic. N0504-4045 3TR002330EAA Printed in Japan . call 1. GA 30024 Western: 6550 Katella Ave. Ltd.877. Secaucus.5 Carolina P. 9. Elgin.com/security For customer support. 5770 Ambler Drive. CA 90630 Panasonic Canada Inc. KM. New Jersey 07094 Zone Office Eastern: Three Panasonic Way. Cypress.Panasonic System Solutions Company.ca Panasonic Sales Company Division of Panasonic Puerto Rico Inc.Mississauga. San Gabriel Industrial Park 65th Infantry Ave..panasonic. Suwanee. L4W 2T3 Canada (905)624-5010 http://www. Ontario.3689 Executive Office: Three Panasonic Way 2H-2. IL 60123 Southern: 1225 Northbrook Parkway.